OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan 16.0 - User and Administration Guide English (CLES160000-UGD-En-1)

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 300

OpenText™ Imaging Enterprise Scan

User and Administration Guide

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan is a scan client for scanning,


indexing, and archiving documents. It features high-quality and
high-volume scanning and mass scan scenarios. This guide
describes how to use and administer OpenText Imaging
Enterprise Scan.

CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
OpenText™ Imaging Enterprise Scan
User and Administration Guide
CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Rev.: 24. Mar. 2016
This documentation has been created for software version 16.0.
It is also valid for subsequent software versions as long as no new document version is shipped with the product or is
published at https://knowledge.opentext.com.

Open Text SA

40 Avenue Monterey , Luxembourg, Luxembourg L-2163

Tel: 35 2 264566 1

Open Text Corporation

275 Frank Tompa Drive, Waterloo, Ontario, Canada, N2L 0A1

Tel: +1-519-888-7111
Toll Free Canada/USA: 1-800-499-6544 International: +800-4996-5440
Fax: +1-519-888-0677
Support: http://support.opentext.com
For more information, visit https://www.opentext.com

Copyright © 2016 Open Text SA or Open Text ULC (in Canada). All Rights Reserved.
Trademarks owned by Open Text SA or Open Text ULC (in Canada).

Disclaimer

No Warranties and Limitation of Liability

Every effort has been made to ensure the accuracy of the features and techniques presented in this publication. However,
Open Text Corporation and its affiliates accept no responsibility and offer no warranty whether expressed or implied, for the
accuracy of this publication.
Table of Contents

PRE Introduction ix
i What is OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan? ..................................... ix
ii About this documentation ................................................................. xi
iii Respect for legal guidelines ............................................................. xii

Part 1 Basic tasks 15

1 Sorting the paper documents ................................................. 17

2 Starting the scanner and Enterprise Scan ............................ 19

3 Scanning .................................................................................. 23
3.1 Scanning documents ....................................................................... 23
3.2 Scanning from external storage ........................................................ 24
3.3 Scanning from fax ........................................................................... 25
3.4 Dual stream scanning ...................................................................... 26

4 Postprocessing the scanned pages ...................................... 27


4.1 Selecting pages and documents ....................................................... 28
4.2 Navigating through documents and pages ........................................ 28
4.3 Rotating pages ................................................................................ 32
4.4 Copying and pasting pages into other applications ............................ 33
4.5 Dragging image files to the Thumbnails view ..................................... 33
4.6 Moving documents .......................................................................... 34
4.7 Separating or joining documents ...................................................... 36
4.8 Merging documents ......................................................................... 37
4.9 Deleting pages ................................................................................ 37
4.10 Changing the document group, batch, or folder ................................. 38
4.11 Changing the index ......................................................................... 39
4.12 Homogenizing colors ....................................................................... 39
4.13 Marking documents for further processing ........................................ 40
4.14 Sending files to a email recipient ...................................................... 41
4.15 Printing documents ......................................................................... 41

5 Importing documents .............................................................. 43

6 Exporting documents .............................................................. 45


6.1 Exporting to file system ................................................................... 45
6.2 Exporting to external storage ........................................................... 45

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide iii


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Table of Contents

7 Indexing and archiving documents ....................................... 47

8 Settings and options ............................................................... 51


8.1 Customizing toolbars ....................................................................... 51
8.2 Customizing keyboard shortcuts ....................................................... 51
8.3 Configuring user options .................................................................. 52
8.4 Configuring display of thumbnails ..................................................... 53

Part 2 Profiles and advanced configuration 55

9 Working with profiles .............................................................. 57


9.1 Preparations ................................................................................... 57
9.2 Creating a profile ............................................................................. 58
9.3 Modifying existing profiles ................................................................ 60
9.4 Validating profiles ............................................................................ 61
9.5 Working with different profiles .......................................................... 61

10 Configuring input .................................................................... 63


10.1 Configuring the format checker ........................................................ 64
10.2 Configuring an external storage ....................................................... 65
10.3 Configuring file input ........................................................................ 67
10.4 Configuring file import ...................................................................... 69
10.5 Configuring ISIS scanners ............................................................... 69
10.6 Configuring Kofax certified scanners and VirtualReScan .................... 81
10.7 Configuring fax input ....................................................................... 82

11 Configuring processing .......................................................... 85


11.1 Configuring page processing ............................................................ 86
11.2 Separating documents (document creation) .................................... 110
11.3 Configuring batch and folder creation or assignment ....................... 115
11.4 Configuring document processing .................................................. 119
11.5 Configuring document classification ................................................ 121

12 Configuring indexing and archiving .................................... 127


12.1 Configuring indexing and archiving scenarios .................................. 127
12.2 Configuring an Init-Profile script ..................................................... 131
12.3 Configuring indexing ...................................................................... 131
12.4 Configuring a Pre-Archive script ..................................................... 158
12.5 Configuring archiving ..................................................................... 159

Part 3 Administration tasks 185

13 Configuring workstation options ......................................... 187


13.1 Configuring the path to the storage and thumbnails cache ............... 187

iv OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Table of Contents

13.2 Configuring general workstation options ......................................... 188


13.3 Configuring the document index ..................................................... 189
13.4 Configuring global script functions .................................................. 190
13.5 Configuring document groups, batches and folders ......................... 190
13.6 Configuring the scanning view ....................................................... 190
13.7 Configuring Configuration Management settings ............................. 192

14 Defining areas for recognition ............................................. 193


14.1 Creating area sets ......................................................................... 193
14.2 Configuring area sets .................................................................... 194

15 Changing permissions .......................................................... 197

16 Sharing, exporting, and importing the configuration ........ 199


16.1 Working with the registry mode - local configuration management .... 202
16.2 Working with the server mode - Archive Center ............................... 203
16.3 Working with the server mode - Capture Center Server ................... 204
16.4 Uploading and downloading Enterprise Scan configurations ............ 205

17 Defining archiving settings .................................................. 209


17.1 Configuring Server and Document Pipeline settings ........................ 209
17.2 Defining the sign in to TCP ............................................................ 211
17.3 Defining the sign in to Content Server ............................................. 212
17.4 Defining the sign in to SAP ............................................................ 215
17.5 Configuring archiving from the leading application ........................... 216

18 Monitoring archiving through Document Pipeline ............. 217

19 Backing up data ..................................................................... 219


19.1 Backing up the document stack ...................................................... 219
19.2 Backing up the Document Pipeline directory ................................... 220
19.3 Backing up external storage repositories ........................................ 220

20 Troubleshooting .................................................................... 221


20.1 General recommendation .............................................................. 221
20.2 Troubleshooting Enterprise Scan ................................................... 222

21 Troubleshooting Document Pipelines for Enterprise Scan 229


21.1 Restarting Document Pipeline ........................................................ 229
21.2 Working with the spawncmd utility .................................................. 229
21.3 Spawner and Document Pipeline log files ....................................... 233

22 Reporting incident to SAP .................................................... 235

Part 4 Reference 237

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide v


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Table of Contents

23 Menus and icons ................................................................... 239


23.1 File menu ..................................................................................... 239
23.2 Edit menu ..................................................................................... 239
23.3 View menu ................................................................................... 241
23.4 Page menu ................................................................................... 242
23.5 Document menu ........................................................................... 243
23.6 Profile menu ................................................................................. 245
23.7 Tools menu ................................................................................... 245
23.8 Help menu .................................................................................... 246

24 Using a template for scan operator checklists ................... 247

25 Working with scripts for indexing and archiving ............... 251


25.1 Scripts in the interactive phase ....................................................... 251
25.2 Scripts in the export phase ............................................................ 258
25.3 Global function depot .................................................................... 260

26 Separating documents by barcode and sorting into


groups using regular expressions ....................................... 263

27 Rendering PDFs with an external tool ................................. 265

28 Working with placeholders for notes .................................. 269

29 Using color reduction methods ........................................... 271

30 Working with regular expressions ....................................... 273

31 Improving the quality of scanned pages ............................. 277

Part 5 Imaging Enterprise Scan Web Interface 279

32 Configuring Imaging Enterprise Scan Web Interface ........ 281

33 Scanning and indexing documents with Imaging


Enterprise Scan Web Interface ............................................. 283

Part 6 Appendix 285

34 Searchable PDF Doctool ....................................................... 287

35 Configuring JAWS screen reader ........................................ 291

36 Creating customer specific online help .............................. 293

37 Frequently asked questions ................................................. 295


37.1 General questions ......................................................................... 295
37.2 Questions about scanners ............................................................. 295

vi OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Table of Contents

37.3 Questions about barcodes ............................................................. 296

GLS Glossary 297

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide vii


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Preface

Introduction
i What is OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan?
OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan (Enterprise Scan) is the solution for mass
scanning and indexing of documents at one or more scan stations. With Enterprise
Scan, workflows can be implemented from receipt by post, through scanning and
linking to the leading application, and then through to archiving. After scanning, the
pages can be checked carefully, straightened, and cleaned up. Several functions are
available to improve contrast and legibility. Enterprise Scan also provides support
for sorting and archiving.

The following examples demonstrate typical scenarios for Enterprise Scan.

Example 1: Enterprise Scan with Document Pipeline

This is the most frequently used scenario. Enterprise Scan either directs a
scanner to acquire images or retrieves them from another input source. After
processing, the documents and the index data are passed to a Document
Pipeline, which in turn transfers them to the target system. Since Document
Pipeline runs asynchronously to Enterprise Scan, the Enterprise Scan
operator can continue scanning even as the document is being transferred.

Document Pipeline typically runs on the same workstation as Enterprise


Scan. However, Document Pipeline can use a remote pipeline to run on
Archive Center.

Example 2: Enterprise Scan with OpenText Capture Center

In this scenario, Enterprise Scan is one of several sources for Capture Center
to receive images from. Similar to Document Pipeline in the Enterprise Scan
with Document Pipeline scenario (see example 1 Example 1, “Enterprise
Scan with Document Pipeline” on page ix), Capture Center separates image
processing and data transfer to the target system from the scanning
operation. In addition, Capture Center allows for intelligent document

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide ix


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Introduction

classification and data extraction with optical character recognition (OCR). It


also allows for efficient and distributed manual document indexing.

Capture Center typically runs on a separate server and receives input from
multiple Enterprise Scan workstations.

Example 3: Enterprise Scan connected directly to Content Server

In this scenario, Enterprise Scan stores the scanned documents directly into
Content Server without using Document Pipeline. This is a convenient setup
for lower volume scenarios.

Example 4: Scan and index from Content Server

In this scenario, Enterprise Scan is invoked from Content Server. The user
starts Enterprise Scan from its Content Server Web client. This is a low
volume scanning scenario.

x OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Introduction

Example 5: Multi-stage processing with Enterprise Scan

It is possible to have a limited form of distributed indexing with Enterprise


Scan without using Capture Center. A first instance of Enterprise Scan is
used to scan the images and store them in external storage. This is a special
storage format for the intermediate data in the file system. Another instance
of Enterprise Scan then loads the content in external storage as if it had been
scanned.

This scenario can be used if one employee scans the images while other
employees do the indexing. It can also be useful if scanning is delegated to
an external service bureau.

The indexing values cannot be considered while working with an external


storage. For more information, see “Archiving to external storage”
on page 178.

ii About this documentation


This documentation describes how to administer and use Enterprise Scan.

ii.i Target readership


According to different tasks and knowledge background, there are various user
groups for Enterprise Scan.

There might be overlap between the different user groups because one task might be
carried out by one target group or the other.

Target group Tasks Knowledge


Unskilled scan Scanning, basic postprocessing and • Basic Windows
operators archiving documents. For more knowledge
information, see “Basic tasks” • Basic knowledge of the
on page 15. leading application

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide xi


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Introduction

Target group Tasks Knowledge


Experienced scan • Scanning, basic postprocessing • Basic Windows
operators and archiving documents. For knowledge
more information, see “Basic • Expert image
tasks” on page 15). processing knowledge
• Experienced postprocessing. For
more information, see
“Configuring processing“
on page 85).
Scan administrators • Experienced postprocessing. For • Expert Windows
more information, see knowledge
“Configuring processing“ • Expert image
on page 85. processing knowledge
• Configuring profiles. For more • Expert administration
information, see “Working with knowledge
profiles“ on page 57).
• Administration tasks. For more
information, see “Administration
tasks” on page 185).
• Preparing scan operator
instructions. For more
information, see “Using a
template for scan operator
checklists“ on page 247.
OpenText Global • Configuring basic profiles in • Expert administration
Technical Services collaboration with the scan knowledge
members administrator. For more • Expert knowledge of
information, see “Working with OpenText products
profiles“ on page 57.
• Preparing scan operator
instructions. For more
information, see “Using a
template for scan operator
checklists“ on page 247.

iii Respect for legal guidelines


Since electronic archives often contain a company's entire business correspondence,
the legal requirements relating to electronic archives are as strict as those for
conventional archives. Electronic archives are also subject to audits and checks. A
few remarks about how the scan functionalities of Enterprise Scan conform to and
support these requirements are made here.

• A fundamental accounting principle is that archives should be maintained


correctly and should be open to inspection. Since individual documents, which
are stored incorrectly in an electronic archive are very difficult to locate, you
should take special care when storing and assigning individual pages to
documents. After archiving, you should make sure that the documents are
actually available in the leading software system. To do this, you can check the

xii OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Introduction

Document Pipeline to ensure that processing was successful. If documents are


only scanned and archived after the data is entered into the leading system, you
should do spot checks to ensure that they are archived correctly.
• For tax purposes, your business may also be required to store the paper originals
for all documents archived electronically. The paper archive should be clearly
structured and permit rapid access to documents.
• A legal basis of all business operation is the prompt execution of operations. For
electronic archiving with Enterprise Scan, this basic principle is not directly
applicable, as the time needed for scanning and archiving depends on the timely
accounting in the leading software system. Therefore, take the necessary
organizational actions to ensure that scanning and archiving is coordinated with
the processes on the leading application. Keep in mind that these actions have to
meet your local legal requirements.
• The scanning software allows you to delete pages. However, if relevant pages or
documents are deleted, there is a risk that the pages for archiving may not be
complete. Before deleting pages, make sure that the paper original of the
corresponding page is still available. When deleting, you should also observe any
mandatory, national retention periods for documents.
• If a scan operation is interrupted, there is no guarantee that all the pages will be
available in the scan dialog box. In this case, check carefully to see if all the pages
have been scanned and that documents are complete.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide xiii


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Part 1
Basic tasks
Part 1 Basic tasks

This part deals with the basic tasks of a scan operator. As these tasks contain
company-specific elements, for example profile names, this manual cannot provide
exact step-by-step instructions, but rather a more general view. In most of the cases
the scan administrator prepares an additional checklist for the scan operators that
describes the company-specific parts for the scan operators. For more information,
see “Using a template for scan operator checklists“ on page 247.

16 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 1
Sorting the paper documents

Before you can start scanning paper pages, you must first sort them according to the
configured profiles, based on contents and paper quality. You can sort documents in
the following ways:
• Sort the documents according to the contents (for example invoices), because the
documents will be dealt with differently in terms of their technical processing,
workflows, storage durations, and access rights.
• Sort the documents according to their legibility (for example bad, medium, good),
because legibility can be improved automatically if you choose the right profile.

In most cases, the documents are separated by barcodes or patch codes. But in some
cases it is necessary to insert separator pages between the individual documents. The
documents are separated during scanning and the blank pages are removed
automatically during postprocessing.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 17


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 2
Starting the scanner and Enterprise Scan

You must start the scanner before you start Enterprise Scan. How to start your
scanner is described in the scanner documentation. Refer to the Release Notes for
supported scanners.

Notes
• If you start Enterprise Scan for the first time you have to confirm that
Enterprise Scan is allowed to communicate to private and/or public
networks.
• The default port used by Enterprise Scan is 11989. If this port is not available
Enterprise Scan automatically chooses the next available port in a range
within the next 500 ports.
• The default port used by Enterprise Scan started by Scan&Index from
Content Server is 11990. If this port is not available Enterprise Scan
automatically chooses the next available port in a range within the next 500
ports.
• If you start Enterprise Scan directly from Content Server, some advanced
functions like configuring subprofiles will not be available.

To start Enterprise Scan:

• Click Programs > Start > OpenText > Enterprise Scan.


Enterprise Scan starts and shows the profile that was last used.

To exit Enterprise Scan:

• Click File > Exit.

Note: Pages that are scanned but not archived are saved locally on your
computer.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 19


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 2 Starting the scanner and Enterprise Scan

Figure 2-1: The areas of the user interface

User interface Enterprise Scan user interface comprises several distinguishable areas, as shown in
Figure 2-1.

(1) Toolbars
You can find a list of the available toolbars in “Menus and icons“ on page 239.
To customize the toolbars, see “Customizing toolbars” on page 51.

(2) Views
You can open different frames, which are also known as Views in the program
window. The following views are available:

View name Usage


Documents Lists all documents currently opened in the document stack. This
view can be used for actions with the whole document. Right-
click a document to open a context menu that provides frequently
used commands from the Page and Document menu.
Indexing Shows the indexing form if an Archiving profile with indexing
mask is selected.

20 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
View name Usage
View Displays the currently active page in the Thumbnails view. You
can use this view for actions with a single page. Right-click a
document to open a context menu that provides frequently used
commands from the Page and Document menu. You can change
the View view to a floating window. For more information, see
“Working with a floating View pane” on page 30.
Index Item If indexing areas are defined, then this view will show the area
which contains the indexing information. For more information,
see “Assigning zooming areas to indexing fields” on page 157.
You can define one or more area(s) per index field. For more
information, see “Indexing TCP attributes with multiple values”
on page 135 and “Indexing attributes with multiple rows from
Content Server” on page 141. When the user fills an index field,
the item view will focus on the area of the document which
belongs to that index field.
Properties Shows the properties of the currently selected page. If more than
one page is selected, only those properties that are the same for
each page are displayed.
Document section
Index
This is the main index field of the document and serves
different purposes depending on the scanning scenario. In
Late archiving with barcode it holds the detected patch code or
barcode value.
Group
You can classify the documents into several groups. When
used in conjunction with Capture Center the value of this
field is mapped to the document class. When document
scanning and indexing is done with Enterprise Scan at two
different workstations, this field can be used to select a set of
scanned documents. For more information, see “Exporting to
external storage” on page 45.
Batch and Folder
You can subdivide documents into a hierarchical structure,
with batches on top and folders below batches. For more
information, see “Changing the document group, batch, or
folder” on page 38.
Page section
Endorser
Some scanner models support endorsing, which means a
stamp is printed on each scanned sheet to confirm scanning.
This field displays the endorser stamp.
All other properties cannot be changed manually.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 21


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 2 Starting the scanner and Enterprise Scan

View name Usage


Thumbnails Displays an overview of either all scanned documents or the
selected documents in a miniaturized form, also known as
thumbnails. This view can be used for actions with one or more
pages, either in the same document or in different documents. To
customize the size of the thumbnails, see “Configuring display of
thumbnails” on page 53. Right-click a document to open a
context menu that provides frequently used commands from the
Page and Document menu.
Tree Lists all documents in a hierarchical tree structure, with Batch as
the top branch and Folder as a subbranch. You can filter the
Tree view to show only documents classified into a certain
Group. For more information, see “Working with the Tree view”
on page 31.

(3) Status bar


The status bar is located at the bottom of the screen and shows:
• The user who is logged in.
• The number of pages scanned in the last scan operation (Scanned 5).
• The number of documents archived in the last archive operation (Archived
1).
• The document with focus and the total number of documents (Doc 1/8).
• The page with focus and the total number of pages of a document (Page 2/6).
• The page number (Page ID: 0).
• The total number of pages in the document stack (Total Pages: 20).

22 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 3
Scanning

3.1 Scanning documents


You have two possibilities to scan documents:
• Automatically, which means scanning from Enterprise Scan.
To cancel the scanning operation, click Stop in Enterprise Scan.
• Manually, which means scanning manually from the scanner.
To cancel the scanning operation, click Stop in Enterprise Scan and at the scanner.

To scan documents:

1. In the Profiles toolbar, select the appropriate profile from the list.

Note: Depending on the kind of input device, the following additional


steps may be necessary:
• File import: Define the directory from where the documents should be
imported. For more information, see “Importing documents“
on page 43.
• External Storage: Select the external storage and the required document
group. For more information, see “Scanning from external storage”
on page 24.
• Fax: Select the faxes that should be scanned. For more information, see
“Scanning from fax” on page 25.
2. To start the scan operation, click File > Scan.
The scanned documents are added to the document stack.

Note: Depending on the configuration, you might be prompted with one


or more of the following dialog boxes:
• If Classification by User was defined for the chosen profile, the Select
Group dialog box opens.
Select the Group name from the list or enter a name for a new group.
This new group is created during scanning. The scanned pages are
assigned to the selected group.
• If Batch Creation or Assignment by User was defined for the chosen
profile, the Select Batch dialog box opens.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 23


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 3 Scanning

Select the Batch from the list or enter a name for a new batch. This new
batch is created during scanning. The scanned pages are assigned to the
selected batch.
• If Folder Creation or Assignment by User was defined for the selected
profile, the Select Folder dialog box opens.
Select the Folder from the list or enter a name for a new folder. This new
folder is created during scanning. The scanned pages are assigned to the
selected folder.
If you click Cancel in the Select <Name> dialog box, the complete scan
operation is cancelled, not only the selection.

Tip: If the scanning process is configured appropriately, you can perform


actions on the documents in the stack while scanning is in progress. For
more information, see “Configuring the scanning view” on page 190.
Otherwise, Enterprise Scan is blocked until the scanning is completed.

3. Optional You can rescan pages, for example if they have not been scanned
correctly.

a. To replace existing pages, select the pages, and then click File > Rescan >
Scan and replace.
b. To insert pages, select the page to the right of where you want to insert the
new page, and then click File > Rescan > Scan and insert.

A dialog box opens, according to the selected input sub profile. If you have the
appropriate permission, you can temporarily change the input device settings.
For example, if you have scanned a document with 100 dpi, you can rescan it
with 300 dpi, a second time.
If you do not have permission to change the input device settings, you can only
rescan with the same settings as were used in the initial scan. For example, if the
problem was a paper jam or a problem with the physical scanner, you would
not need to change the settings.

3.2 Scanning from external storage


When you choose External Storage as an input device, Enterprise Scan first checks if
there are scanning-enabled documents in the defined storage.

The following areas are available on the Scan from External Storage dialog box:

External Storage
Lists storage types that have been registered in the Profile Configuration dialog
box. When no external storage is configured, you do not get a message because
the list is empty.

Groups of documents
Displays the Group name and the Number of documents in the group.

24 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
3.3. Scanning from fax

To start the scanning operation:

1. Select a storage type in the External Storage list.


2. Click the group you want to scan.
3. Click Scan.

3.3 Scanning from fax


Enterprise Scan supports scanning faxes from Microsoft Exchange and Lotus Notes
fax connectors. When a fax arrives, a dialog box displays the contents of the fax
lines. The content of the dialog box is the same for both connectors.

The following areas are available on the Scan from Microsoft Exchange dialog box:

Received faxes
Shows the Fax line, ID, Number, Sender, and Received attributes of all received
faxes.
Preview
Displays a preview of the pages using the page scroll tool if Enable preview is
selected.

Unsupported image formats

An unsupported image format is .zip, or for example an inline or embedded


logo in .gif format.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 25


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 3 Scanning

• If a fax contains an unsupported image format, the message Unsupported


image format is displayed in the Preview area.
• If a fax contains supported and unsupported image formats, but no corrupt
images, it is moved to the Deleted folder.
• If a fax contains at least one corrupt image, it is moved to the Error folder.
• If an unsupported image format is scanned, a log entry is generated. For
example
ERROR 2016/01/25 14:43:05.613 EnterpriseScan.exe:
4372\imgcore30_Scan.dll:4428 IOManager.cpp,637 MSG0 Unsupported
input file format.

To start the scanning operation:

1. In the Received faxes area, select one or more of the faxes that you want to scan.

2. Click Scan.

3.4 Dual stream scanning


Enterprise Scan supports dual stream scanning to improve the scanning speed for
color images. Dual stream scanning splits the color data into two streams - source
color data and monochrome data. All processing operations use monochrome data
to make scanning and processing faster. When the processing is finished, the GUI is
updated and monochrome image data is displayed. For more information, see
“Viewing B/W mode” on page 29.

Important

• When archiving, Enterprise Scan exports the source color data, not the
processed monochrome image data.
• Do not use image manipulation functions, for example rotation or de-
speckle. These types of effects are only displayed on the monochrome
image. The archived image remains unchanged.

The following types of dual stream scanning are available in Enterprise Scan:

Software emulation
Enterprise Scan internally extracts the monochrome image from the scanned
color image to create two streams. For more information, see “Configuring
input“ on page 63.

Hardware dual stream


This option is only available for scanners that support multi-streaming.
Enterprise Scan configures the scanner driver to send two streams (monochrome
and color) for each scanned color page. For more information, see “Configuring
Page settings for ISIS scanners” on page 70.

26 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 4
Postprocessing the scanned pages

After scanning the paper documents, you must check the documents in Enterprise
Scan for completeness, order, and legibility.

Due to the very high quality of modern scanners and to well-prepared profile
management by the Enterprise Scan administrator, manual postprocessing steps are
rarely necessary. Most of the postprocessing is performed automatically during
scanning. For more information, see “Configuring processing“ on page 85.

The following table lists and describes problems that may occur and must be solved
manually:

Problem Manual postprocessing task


The document is scanned using Rotate the document to the correct orientation. For
the wrong orientation. more information, see “Rotating pages” on page 32.
The pages of a document are in Sort the document. For more information, see“Moving
the wrong order. documents” on page 34.
The paper document was folded Delete the pages and scan the document again. For
during scanning and the scanned more information, see “Deleting pages” on page 37.
page cannot be used. Or use the Rescan command in the File menu. For more
information, see “Scanning documents” on page 23.
The automatic separation during Separate or merge the document manually. For more
scanning did not work correctly. information, see “Separating or joining documents”
on page 36.
Groups were not automatically Correct the document group manually. For more
classified correctly. information, see “Changing the document group, batch,
or folder” on page 38.
The document index is incorrect. Correct the index manually. For more information, see
“Changing the index” on page 39.
The document's legibility is poor. Adjust the colors. For more information, see
“Homogenizing colors” on page 39.
Pages from a double-sided Merge the two documents. For more information, see
original have been scanned in by a “Merging documents” on page 37.
device that can only scan one side
at a time.

If these correction steps do not work, an experienced scan operator or the


administrator can use additional advanced correction functions. For more
information, see “Configuring page processing” on page 86.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 27


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 4 Postprocessing the scanned pages

If the postprocessing will be done by another person, you can mark documents that
require further corrections. For more information, see “Marking documents for
further processing” on page 40.

4.1 Selecting pages and documents


A document consists of one or more pages. All postprocessing actions are only valid
for the currently selected pages or documents.

The following table describes how to select pages and documents.

Select one or more Click the document in the Documents view. Select multiple
documents documents with the CTRL key.
Select one or more Use one of the following methods to select one or more pages:
pages • Select the pages in the Thumbnails view using the SHIFT and
CTRL keys.
• Draw a frame in the Thumbnails view.
• Select a single page in the Thumbnails view and expand the
selection with the arrow keys.
Select all pages Use Edit > Select All to select all pages in the document stack.
Invert selection If you want to select nearly all pages in the document stack with
several exceptions, you can select the exceptions first and then invert
the selection with Edit > Invert Selection.
Select marked If one of your colleagues already marked the pages that need post
pages processing, you can select the marked pages with Edit > Select
Marked Pages. For more information, see “Marking documents for
further processing” on page 40.

4.2 Navigating through documents and pages


4.2.1 Working with the Navigation toolbar and keyboard
shortcuts
The Navigation toolbar is invisible by default.

To activate the Navigation toolbar:

• In the View menu, select Navigation Toolbar.


For the function of the toolbar icons and the corresponding keyboard shortcuts,
see “Edit menu” on page 239.
The navigation keyboard shortcuts work the same way in the Page, Document,
and Thumbnails view. In the Indexing view, press ALT together with them to
achieve the same effect.

28 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
4.2. Navigating through documents and pages

4.2.2 Zooming
You have several possibilities to zoom pages.

To zoom pages:

1. Select a page.

2. Use the zooming icons in the main toolbar or in the View menu. For more
information, see “View menu” on page 241.
You can also use + to enlarge and - to shrink the page. These work the same way
in the Page, Document, and Thumbnails view. In the Indexing view, press
ALT together with them to achieve the same effect.

3. To fit the page to window, height, or width, right-click in the View view, and
click Scale, and then choose Fit Window, Fit Height, or Fit Width.

4. To scale every new displayed page to the size specified when lock was set,
right-click, and then click Scale > Scale Lock.

4.2.3 Viewing B/W mode


If Emulate dual stream mode is enabled, the View view displays a monochrome
image of the color image that was originally scanned. This is indicated by (B/W
Mode) in the header of the View view. All processing operations will apply to the
monochrome image.

Note: When archiving, Enterprise Scan exports the source color data, not the
processed monochrome image data.

To display the original color image:

• Right-click a page, and then click View source image.


To switch back to the monochrome view, select another page, and then change
back.

4.2.4 Viewing transparent PDF


If a PDF file was scanned and the Transparent passthrough for PDF feature was
selected in the input subprofile, the View view as well as the Thumbnails view
display first page of the Adobe Reader logo for the PDF file. This is indicated by
(PDF Replacement) in the header of the View view. For more information, see
Transparent passthrough for PDF on page 64.

Tips
• If Emulate dual stream mode is enabled, the View view displays a
monochrome image of the color image that was originally scanned.
• If a PDF file cannot be rendered it displays the Adobe Reader logo.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 29


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 4 Postprocessing the scanned pages

To display the original PDF document:

• In the View view, right-click the first page, and then click View PDF.
The PDF Viewer opens and displays the first page of the PDF document.
Navigating through the pages of the PDF file is possible using the spin box.
Changes of the dialog box size and location persist for the current session only.
After restarting Enterprise Scan the default values are used again.
To switch back to the PDF replacement view, close the PDF Viewer.

4.2.5 Working with scrollbars


In the View view, you can select a larger scale to see details on the displayed page,
so the view gets scrollbars.

To navigate on a page with scrollbars without using the mouse:

• Keep CTRL pressed, and then use the arrows of the numeric keypad.

4.2.6 Working with a floating View pane


To change the View view into a floating View pane:

• Double-click the header bar of the View view or drag the View view from its
location.

Tips
• You can enlarge the floating View pane by resizing its window.
• You can drag the floating View pane to relocate it inside or outside of the
Enterprise Scan window. For example, you could drag the floating View
pane to a second monitor to have a larger display
• You can perform the same actions in the floating View pane as in the View
view.
• The page you select in the Thumbnails view is displayed in the floating
View pane.
• When you drag the floating View pane inside the Enterprise Scan window,
docking icons are displayed on the margins and in the middle of the
window. If you drag the floating View pane to one of these icons, it is
docked at this location.
• When you close the docked View view or the floating View pane using the
close button in the title bar, the original size is restored if you open the
View view again using the View menu.
• When you close the docked View view or the floating View pane using the
View menu, the window settings are lost. Opening the View view again
uses the default window settings.

30 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
4.2. Navigating through documents and pages

• The default window size is 300 x 300 pixels. It is displayed if the View view
is displayed for the first time as dragged window, auto-hide window or as
floating window by double clicking the window title bar.
• In following situations when the View view is closed Enterprise Scan will
use the default window settings:
• Shutting down Enterprise Scan.
• Switching to another profile or subprofile.
• Changing a subprofile.
• The View view window settings of different profiles are preserved for each
profile.

To restore the View view:

• Double-click the header bar of the floating view pane or drag it back into the
Enterprise Scan window.

4.2.7 Working with the Tree view


Enterprise Scan can show documents organized into batches and folders in a
hierarchical tree view. The Tree view displays the batches as primary nodes, and the
folders as secondary nodes with the documents below the folders.

Figure 4-1: Tree view

To work with documents in the Tree view:

1. In the View menu, select Tree.


2. Optional Select the Filter by Group check box to select a group from the list and
display only the documents that belong to the selected group.
The list of available groups is only visible if Filter by Group is selected.
3. Perform the following actions:

• Click Archive Group to archive all documents that belong to the selected
group. Archive Group is only visible if Filter by Group is selected.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 31


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 4 Postprocessing the scanned pages

• Right-click a node, and then click:

• Archive archives the documents below the selected node.

Tip: The Archive action is also available for selected documents,


that is single or multiple selected documents.
• Rename changes the name of the currently selected batch or folder.
Renaming is only enabled explicitly at the selected batch or folder.

If you have modified the static batch or static folder entries in the Workstation
Options the Tree view must be updated.

To update the Tree view:

• Perform one of the following actions:

Note: Using these actions the current batch and folder nodes state
(expanded/collapsed) is not preserved.

• Close and open the Tree view.


• Reload the configuration.
• Restart Enterprise Scan.

Note: Using these actions the current batch and folder nodes state
(expanded/collapsed) is preserved.

• Changing the document properties Batch, or Folder in Properties view.


• Moving a document in the Tree view.

4.3 Rotating pages


Some pages may have been scanned using the incorrect orientation. Rotate these
pages before the document is archived to avoid having to rotate the pages in the
viewer each time the document is retrieved.

To rotate pages:

1. Select each page you want to rotate in the Thumbnails, Documents, or View
view.

2. Right-click, and click Rotation, and then choose Rotate 180°, Rotate Left, or
Rotate Right. For more information, see “Page menu” on page 242.

32 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
4.4. Copying and pasting pages into other applications

4.4 Copying and pasting pages into other


applications
You can copy pages in Enterprise Scan to the Windows clipboard and paste them
into other image editing applications, for example Microsoft Word or Microsoft
Paint.

To copy a page and paste it to other image editing applications:

1. In the Thumbnails view, select a page you want to copy in the Thumbnails
view.
2. To copy the page, press CTRL + C or select Edit > Copy from the menu.

Note: If you select more than one page, only the first page of the selection
is copied to the clipboard.
3. Open the image editing application you want to paste the page into.

Note: You cannot copy pages from Enterprise Scan and paste them into
the file system, for example in Windows Explorer. Use the Export function
instead.
4. Navigate to the location where you want to insert the page.
5. To paste the page, press CTRL + V.
The page is pasted into the application as a bitmap.

4.5 Dragging image files to the Thumbnails view


You can import image files as new pages by dragging them into the Thumbnails
view of Enterprise Scan. The import is useful if you want to add pages with
barcodes after you have scanned documents that do not have barcodes. As a
prerequisite, the stack must contain at least one document, or the import will not
work. Multipage TIFF files are added as pages, not as new documents.

The following scenarios are possible:


• “To drag image files from the file system:“ on page 33
• “To copy images from another image editing application:“ on page 34

To drag image files from the file system:

1. In the file system, for example in Windows Explorer, select each image file you
want to import to Enterprise Scan.
2. In the Thumbnails view, drag the selected files to the position where you want
to insert them.

Tip: Enterprise Scan indicates the drop position.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 33


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 4 Postprocessing the scanned pages

The files are added to the document as new pages.

Note: Importing documents to Enterprise Scan by dragging skips all


processing steps that are defined in the processing subprofile for the current
active profile.

Tip: You can also import a complete folder of image files. All files in the folder
are added to the document as new pages.

To copy images from another image editing application:

1. In the image editing application, for example Microsoft Word or Microsoft


Paint, select the image you want to import to Enterprise Scan.

2. To copy the image, press CTRL + C.

3. In Enterprise Scan, paste the image using CTRL + V or by selecting Edit > Paste
from the menu.
The image is added in the Thumbnails view as a new page after the selected
page.

Notes

• You cannot copy image files from the file system and past them into
Enterprise Scan.
• You cannot copy more than one image at a time using Enterprise Scan.

4.6 Moving documents


The pages of a document can be in the wrong order or can belong to another
document. Complete documents can also be at the wrong place in the document stack.
You can perform the following procedures to correct these issues.

To move page(s) or document(s):

1. In the Thumbnails, Documents, or Tree view, select each page or document


you want to move.

Tips

• You can move the selected documents and/or pages within


Thumbnails, Documents, or Tree view.
• You can use the Tree view as target for drag and drop from the
Thumbnails and Documents view.
• You can select folders and batches in the Tree view.

2. Drag them to the correct position.

34 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
4.6. Moving documents

Only for Tree view as drag target


• The group of the moved documents remain unchanged.
• Moving to a batch node: Only the batch attribute is set.
• Moving to a folder of a batch: Both batch and folder attributes are set.
• If the group filter of the Tree view is active you can still move
documents having a different group from Thumbnails view or
Documents view to the Tree view node. The group of the moved
documents remain unchanged. Only batch and/or folder of the
documents are changed accordingly to the dropped node.

Tip: Thumbnails, Documents, or Tree view allow scrolling while


dragging. The views indicate the drop position.

To move page(s) using the clipboard:

1. In the Thumbnails view, select each page you want to move.


2. Cut the page(s) pressing Ctrl + X.
3. Go to the correct position, and then insert the page(s) pressing Ctrl + V.
The page(s) are inserted after the selection.

To move document(s) to a batch, folder, or group using the context menu:

1. In Thumbnails view or Documents view, select each document you want to


move.
2. Right-click the document, and then click Document Operation > Move to
Batch, or Move to Folder, or Move to Group.
3. Enter a name or select a name in the drop-down list, and then click OK.

To move document(s) to a position using the context menu:

1. In Thumbnails view or Documents view, select each document you want to


move.
2. Right-click the document, and then click Document Operation > Move to
Position.
3. In the Move document dialog box, select a position in the drop-down list.
4. Click Above or Below to insert the document above or below the selected
position.

If the complete document is scanned in the incorrect order, you can reverse the order
of the pages.

To reverse the order:

1. In the Documents or Thumbnails view, select the document.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 35


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 4 Postprocessing the scanned pages

2. Right-click the document, and then click Document Operation > Reverse.

4.7 Separating or joining documents


In mass scanning scenarios, the individual documents can be separated
automatically during scanning. The first page of a document is indicated by a
barcode, a patch code, or a blank page, or is defined after a certain number of pages.
For more information, see “Separating documents (document creation)”
on page 110.

It is important to check the documents after automatic separation to make sure that
the documents have been separated correctly. Following problems may occur:

• If a separation condition is not recognized by Enterprise Scan, it appends the


document to the end of the preceding document. The document then has to be
divided into two documents.

To separate documents:

1. Select the page that should be the first page of the new document.

2. Right-click the document, and then click Separate > Separate before
Selection.

A new document is created, beginning with the selected page. It has a row of its
own in the Documents and Thumbnails view and its own document header.
The index information is empty. The original document keeps the original index
information.
To keep the original index information in the new document, the REG_SZ
HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\IXOS\IXOS_ARCHIVE\6.0\Scan\HKLM
\DocumentIndex\B:InheritIndexForSeparation registry key must be set to
“True”.
• If a separation condition has been mistakenly applied, the document is divided
into two separate documents. The documents then have to be joined.

To join documents:

1. In the Documents or Thumbnails view, select the document that contains


the first part of the content that you want to rejoin.

2. Select the remaining document(s) that you want to rejoin.

3. Right-click, and then click Document Operation > Join.


The pages of the last selected documents are appended to the first document
that you selected.

Note: If you only select one document it will connect itself to the next
document in the view.

36 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
4.8. Merging documents

4.8 Merging documents


Merging reconnects the pages of two documents. This is useful when pages from a
double-sided original have been scanned in by a device that can only scan one side
at a time. In this case, the stack is scanned in twice - first with the page facing down,
then with the page facing up. As a result, you get two scanned documents for each
original document. One document contains the even pages of the original, and the
other contains the odd pages.

Figure 4-2: Scanned documents and merged document

To merge documents:

1. Select the documents you want to merge.

2. Right-click, and then click Merge.

4.9 Deleting pages


If you discover that a scanned page is illegible, you can delete it and scan the page
again. However, before deleting the page, make sure that the paper original is still
available. If, for example, a page is folded during scanning, you may need to smooth
the paper original and rescan it. To improve the quality for the second scan, you
may need to modify the scanning configuration settings before you rescan the page.

Important
This scanning software allows you to delete pages. However, there are
conditions of which you should be aware. To ensure that the archiving of
documents is complete and comprehensive, you must archive electronic

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 37


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 4 Postprocessing the scanned pages

images of all documents with all their pages in such a way that the
documents can be retrieved rapidly. In this way, you also ensure compliance
with local legal requirements. You must also store documents for the time
period required by commercial or industrial authorities in your area.

To delete page(s):

1. Select the page(s).

2. Press Shift+Del or click Page > Delete.

3. Confirm the deletion.

Tip: If you do not want to delete immediately, use the Delete Marker in
the Page menu to mark pages intended for deletion. When you decide to
permanently delete the marked pages, select them and press Ctrl+D or
choose Delete Marked in the Page menu. A dialog box asks you to
confirm the deletion.
For details on working with markers, see “Marking documents for further
processing” on page 40. The corresponding toolbar icons are listed in
“Page menu” on page 242.

4.10 Changing the document group, batch, or folder


You can classify documents into several groups. Use these groups, for example, to
exchange documents between several employees. Classification rules fill document
groups with documents. For more information, see “Configuring document
classification” on page 121.

Furthermore, you can subdivide individual documents into a hierarchical structure,


with batches as top branch and folders below batches. Assignment rules fill
document groups with documents. For more information, see “Configuring batch
and folder creation or assignment” on page 115.

In most cases, the classification into document groups and the assignment to batches
and folders is performed automatically during scanning. If no parameters for
classification into groups, or assignment to batches, and folders have been
configured, Enterprise Scan stores the documents in the default group, batch and
folder <none>.

If the automatic document classification or assignment failed, you can change the
name of the group, batch, or folder manually:

To change document group, batch, or folder manually:

1. In the Thumbnails view, select each document you want to move to another
group, batch, or folder.

2. In the Properties view, enter the name of the group, batch, or folder or select the
name from the list.

38 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
4.11. Changing the index

Note: You can define static groups, batches, and folders for your
workstation. For more information, see “Configuring document groups,
batches and folders” on page 190. These static subdivisions are displayed
in the list in the Properties view.

Tip: Alternatively, select Move to Group, Move to Batch, or Move to


Folder from the Document menu, enter the name or select the name from
the list, and then click OK.

4.11 Changing the index


If you use the Late archiving with barcode scenario, the documents are scanned and
archived after the business transaction has been processed in the leading application.
The connection between the business object in the leading application and the
scanned document are established with a barcode. If the automatic barcode
recognition failed, you can change the document index manually.

To change the index:

1. Select the document that contains the index you want to change.

2. In the Document menu, click Change Index.

Note: Whether the index can be modified depends on the options set in
the Document Index tab. For more information, see “Configuring the
document index” on page 189.

3. Enter the correct barcode number, and then click OK.

4.12 Homogenizing colors


In most cases, it is not necessary to correct the document quality manually. Modern
professional scanners automatically improve the document's legibility during
scanning and the administrator can configure scan profiles to automatically correct
the most common legibility problems.

However, if the legibility is still poor, you can increase the color depth to the same
value for all pages of a document.

To convert to the highest color depth:

1. Select the document in the Documents view.

2. Open the Document menu, and then click Homogenize.


The pages are converted to the highest color depth that occurs in the document.

If there are still legibility problems, contact an experienced scan operator or your
administrator to use advanced filter methods. For more information, see
“Configuring page processing” on page 86.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 39


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 4 Postprocessing the scanned pages

4.13 Marking documents for further processing


When checking scanned pages, you may want to mark those that need further
processing.

4.13.1 Setting markers


To set markers:

1. Select the pages you want to mark.

2. Click the icon of the appropriate marker:

Bookmark Marker Insert this marker if you want to label for example the last
page you corrected before lunch break.

Delete Marker Insert this marker if there are pages that should be deleted.
These pages can be deleted afterwards either manually (for
more information, see “Selecting marked pages”
on page 40) or automatically (for more information, see
“Configuring deletion of marked pages” on page 162).

Quality Marker Insert this marker if you have legibility problems with a
specific page and your administrator needs to solve this
problem.

Tip: If the Page toolbar is not displayed add it using View > Page Toolbar.

If the page has already been marked, the marker is removed. For keyboard
shortcuts and additional icons for navigation between markers, see “Menus and
icons“ on page 239.

4.13.2 Selecting marked pages


You can select all pages marked with a specific marker at one time, and then proceed
with actions such as deleting, improving quality, or sorting.

To select marked pages:

1. In the Edit menu, click Select Marked Pages.

2. In the Select Marker dialog box, select the marker type.

Note: The Custom marker option is only used for project specific
solutions where the markers have been defined, for example by a plug-in.

3. Click OK.

40 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
4.14. Sending files to a email recipient

4.14 Sending files to a email recipient


You can send scanned pages to a email recipient, for example if you want your
administrator to check a problem.

To send files:

1. Select each document or page you want to send.

2. Click File > Send.

3. In the Advanced Settings dialog box, enter the output settings. For more
information, see “Defining advanced settings for archiving” on page 179.

4. Click OK.
A new email message appears with the pages attached.

5. Complete the email and send it.

4.15 Printing documents


You can print documents from the document stack, using the standard print
function of your computer.

To print documents:

• Click File > Print.

You can specify some print configuration settings in the Configure Printing dialog
box.

To specify print configuration settings:

1. Click File > Configure Printing.

2. In the Appearance area, specify scaling and margins settings:

Keep original size


Prints the document in its original size. If the page size is bigger than the
paper size of your printer, printing crops the document. This means that
only the part of the page that fits into the paper is printed. In this case, use
the Fit all pages or Fit larger pages only setting.

Fit all pages


Scales all images to the paper size selected in the printer properties. This
enlarges smaller pages and compresses larger pages.

Fit larger pages only


Compresses only the images that are larger than the paper size selected in
the printer properties. Smaller pages stay untouched. This can be useful
when a document contains several different page formats.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 41


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 4 Postprocessing the scanned pages

Use printer margins check box


This setting refers to the fact that most printers cannot print at the very
edges of the paper. Select the Use printer margins check box to ensure that
the printer takes the non-printable margin into consideration and prints the
image inside the margins. The result is that the image is printed completely,
and not cut at the edges.
Leaving Use printer margins cleared leads to the assumption that the entire
paper is available for printing. Printing may cut the image at the edges. This
setting is only useful if the image itself has margins.

3. In the Document range group, select the documents or pages to print:

All documents
Prints all documents in the document stack.

Selected documents
Prints only selected documents.

Selected pages
Prints all selected pages of the current document.

4. In the Printer group, specify printing orientation and paper size:

Orientation
Select Portrait or Landscape orientation for the printed document.

Paper
Select the paper size from the list.

5. To open the standard print dialog box, click Print.

6. Click OK.

42 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 5
Importing documents

You can import documents of all supported image formats and PDF files from the
file system in following ways:

Automatically by configuring File Import or File Input in the Input subprofile


To configure file import, see “Configuring file import” on page 69.
To configure file input, see “Configuring file input” on page 67.
You can configure postprocessing in the Processing subprofile so pages are
processed automatically after importing.

Manually using the Import menu item

To import documents manually:

1. Click File > Import.


2. In the Open dialog box, choose the directory and the files to be imported,
and then click Open.

3. Optional Do the postprocessing of the imported documents manually.

Note: This function is rarely used, usually by administrators when


defining the profiles in order to quickly import test documents.

Note: The language of the Open dialog box depends on the installed operating
system and may differ from the Enterprise Scan language.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 43


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 6
Exporting documents

You can export the documents in the document stack either to the file system or to
external storage.

6.1 Exporting to file system


You can use the export function to export documents to a shared folder. For
example, a different user can import the documents, using File Input, to archive the
documents. The export function creates a subfolder and a fixed file name for each
document.

To export documents to the file system:

1. Select the documents you want to export.


2. Click File > Export.
3. In the Export dialog box, choose a file directory in the Export to field.
4. Select the Remove exported pages check box if the exported documents should
be removed from the document stack.
5. Click Advanced to define some advanced export settings. For more information,
see “Defining advanced settings for archiving” on page 179.
6. Click OK to start the export.

6.2 Exporting to external storage


If the scanning is performed by external providers or the scanning and archiving is
performed by different employees, the data exchange is performed through external
storage. This means that the documents are stored in the file system. The benefit is
that they are stored in different folders according to their different group. Thus the
archiving for invoices, orders or complaints can be performed by different
employees.

To export documents to a external storage:

1. Select the relevant profile.


2. Select the documents you want to export.
3. In the Document menu, select Archive Selected.
The exporting process starts.

Note: You can stop the exporting process by clicking Cancel.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 45


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 6 Exporting documents

After all documents have been exported, the document stack is empty.

46 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 7
Indexing and archiving documents

After the documents are scanned and processed you can start indexing and
archiving.

Indexing fields You add indexing values in the indexing fields of the Indexing view. The following
properties provides general information about indexing fields.

Mandatory fields are marked with .
• Indexing fields that are highlighted in light blue color contain values valid for all
documents. They are persistent when archiving but they are lost if the profile or
subprofile is changed or if Enterprise Scan is shut down.
• Indexing fields that are not highlighted contain values valid for the particular
document. They are persistent, that means they do not change even if a different
document is selected in the stack or if Enterprise Scan is shut down.
• If you select more than one document from the stack (multi-selection), the
indexing fields that contain different values are highlighted in salmon color.
They display the value of the last selected document. When you navigate
through the indexing fields, your actions have the following results:

Navigating by mouse
You move from one indexing field to another. You can change the value by
editing the field. This affects all selected documents.

Navigating by TAB key


You move from one indexing field to the next one. You only change the
value if you edit the field. This affects all selected documents.

Navigating by ENTER key


You assign the current value to all selected documents and move to the next
indexing field.
If you have changed the indexing field value, the salmon color vanishes from the
indexing field because now the value is identical for all selected documents.

Index Item view The Index Item view shows information for indexing enlarged. This part is
highlighted in the View view in a defined color so that the area can be seen in the
context of the whole page. The default value is red.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 47


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 7 Indexing and archiving documents

Note: You can move the indexing items, which are indicated as highlighted
areas in the Indexing view as shown in the following table:

Function Keyboard key


Highlighted area left Alt+Ctrl+Left arrow of the numeric keypad
Highlighted area right Alt+Ctrl+Right arrow of the numeric keypad
Highlighted area up Alt+Ctrl+Up arrow of the numeric keypad
Highlighted area down Alt+Ctrl+Down arrow of the numeric keypad

To index and archive documents:

1. Select the relevant profile.


If indexing is needed for this scenario, two new views open that may look
similar to the screenshot above.
In the Indexing view you enter the properties of the document that are later
used to retrieve the document in the archive. The cursor is in the first indexing
field.

2. Read the property, for example the customer name in the Index Item view, and
then enter it in the corresponding field in the Indexing view.

Tip: The AutoComplete function helps you entering properties more


quickly in the Indexing view field.
For example, after you type the letters co, the program displays a screen
tip that displays the word company. Press ENTER to insert this word or
keep typing the next letter of the word. The word company must already
be entered in this Enterprise Scan session. The list of memorized
suggestions is cleared after restart.
Per default AutoComplete is switched on. You can disable this feature in
the [HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\IXOS\IXOS_ARCHIVE\6.0\Scan
\HKLM\CustomSettings] "B:DisableIndexAutoComplete"="true"
registry key.

48 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
3. Press Enter to go to the next index field.
The entered values are checked and the detailed information for the next index
field is displayed in the Index Item view.

Notes


If the entered values are not correct, the icon and an error message
appears behind the index field.
• This correctness check allows you to go on to another indexing field and
correct the error later. However, you will not be able to archive the
document before correcting the error.

4. Complete all index fields for the document.

5. Press F12 to archive the document.

Tips

• To archive all documents in the document stack, press F2. When the
documents have been archived, the document stack is empty.
• You can cancel the archiving operation by clicking Stop. In this case
the documents that have already been archived are handed over to the
leading application and the other documents stay in the document
stack of Enterprise Scan.

6. The Archive Documents dialog box displays the following values:

Output device
Current archiving profile

Archive mode
Current archive mode

Name
Name of the external storage. Only used for external storage output devices,
instead of Archive Mode.

7. To display details, click Details. Depending on the settings in the Archiving


subprofile, the Details dialog box may look different. For more information, see
“Configuring archiving” on page 159.

Tip: To skip the archive confirmation dialog box, see “Configuring general
workstation options” on page 188.

8. To start archiving, click OK.


The document is archived and the next document in the document stack
appears in the Index Item view.

9. Repeat these steps to index all documents in the document stack.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 49


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 8
Settings and options

You can specify the settings of Enterprise Scan to fit your needs, adjust the options
of the program, and change the display for different views.

8.1 Customizing toolbars


You can configure toolbars according to your preferences.

To customize toolbars:

1. Point to the toolbar you want to customize, right-click, and then click
Customize.

2. To add a button to the toolbar, select the button you want to add in the
Available toolbar buttons list, and then click Add.

3. To remove a button from the toolbar, select the button you want to remove in
the Current toolbar buttons list, and then click Remove.

4. To use large icons for the toolbar, select Large Icons.

8.2 Customizing keyboard shortcuts


You can customize keyboard shortcuts to your preferences. This function is available
for all menu commands.

To customize keyboard shortcuts:

1. Click Tools > Customize Keyboard.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 51


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 8 Settings and options

2. Choose the Category and the Command you want to create a keyboard shortcut
for.

3. Click in the text field and press the corresponding key(s) on the keyboard. The
new shortcut is created and added to the text field.

4. Click Assign to store the new shortcut.

8.3 Configuring user options


You can adapt the settings of Enterprise Scan to your requirements to help you work
more efficiently.

To configure user options:

1. Click Tools > User Options.

2. In the Configure User Options dialog box, define the settings, and then click
OK.

Language
Choose the language in which you want to work with Enterprise Scan. You
can only select languages for which language components have been
installed.

Note: After specifying the language, you must restart Enterprise Scan.

Units
Choose the units of measurement in which you want to work with
Enterprise Scan. If you select System, the regional settings of the operating
system will be used.

52 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
8.4. Configuring display of thumbnails

Log Level
Choose the log level. Normally, Default is set. For troubleshooting
purposes, set the log level to Extended.

8.4 Configuring display of thumbnails


You can adjust the appearance of the Thumbnails view.

To configure display of thumbnails:

1. In the Thumbnails view, right-click and select View Configuration.


2. In the Configure Thumbnails dialog box, define the settings, and then click
OK.

Generate page thumbnails


Select this check box to display a miniaturized view of all pages.

Thumbnails Wrapping
Select this check box to group the pages of a document under a headline
showing the document number. The pages under a document are wrapped
according to the size of the Thumbnails view.

Thumbnail size
Define the thumbnail size in the Maximum width and Maximum height
fields.

Displayed documents
Choose between Show all documents and Show selected document.

You can configure the size of icons in the Thumbnails view by changing Windows
system settings.

To configure the icon size:

1. Click Start > Control Panel > Display.

2. In the Display Properties dialog box, click the Appearance tab.

3. Click Advanced.

4. In the Advanced Appearance dialog box, select Icon Spacing from the Item
list, and then enter a value in the Size box.

5. Click OK.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 53


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Part 2
Profiles and advanced configuration
Chapter 9
Working with profiles

A profile is a collection of configuration steps for a specific scenario. The majority of


scanning and archiving tasks should be covered by a profile; manual postprocessing
is the exception. Using profiles enables scan operators to work more quickly and
efficiently.

A profile can contain up to three subprofiles:

• Input: Specify the source of the data. For more information, see “Configuring
input“ on page 63.
• Processing: In order to attain optimum scanning quality for different types of
original documents, you can configure individual processing settings for each of
them.
You can specify the rules by which scanned pages are separated into documents,
batches, and folders and define how the pages are classified into groups during
scanning. For more information, see “Configuring processing“ on page 85.
• Archiving: Documents can be archived in different ways. They can be archived
through the Document Pipeline into Archive Center, through Capture Center, or
directly into a leading software system or to external storage. You can define the
archiving method in the profile. For more information, see “Configuring
indexing and archiving“ on page 127.

Tip: In most cases, you should distinguish scanning or input scenarios from
archiving scenarios. Pages can be scanned and processed in the same way, but
the resulting documents are archived in different ways. You should create a
profile for each scanning scenario and one for each archiving scenario. Then
you can add and configure the required subprofiles. A scanning or input
scenario usually needs an Input subprofile and a Processing subprofile. An
archiving scenario needs an Archiving subprofile.

9.1 Preparations
The profiles for Enterprise Scan are defined in coordination with OpenText Global
Technical Services. Before you can define these profiles, you have to analyze the
company requirements:

• How many documents should be handled per day?


• Do you use different document sources, such as scanners, external storage,
Microsoft Exchange, or Lotus Notes?
• How is the quality of the paper documents?
• Which leading application is used for document retrieval?

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 57


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 9 Working with profiles

Most profiles are defined during initial configuration of Enterprise Scan, but it is
also possible to extend and modify the profiles if your requirements change.

9.2 Creating a profile


The procedure for creating a profile is always the same, regardless of the type of
subprofile you want to use.

To create a profile:

1. Click Profile > Manage Profiles.


In the Profile Manager dialog box, all existing profiles with the corresponding
subprofiles for Input, Processing, and Archiving are listed. You can Modify,
Rename, or Delete the existing profiles.

Notes

You cannot delete the active profile, which is marked with .
• When you delete a profile, referenced subprofiles are not deleted. They
remain in the corresponding subprofile lists, so that you can use them
for other profiles.

2. In the Profile Manager dialog box, click Create to create a new profile.

3. In the Profile Creation dialog box, enter a profile name, and then click Next.

Tips
• Use a name that is as descriptive as possible.
• You can use an existing profile as a template to create a similar profile.
To do so, select the Copy from check box, and then choose the
respective profile.

4. Click Create to create a new Input subprofile.

Tip: You can use an existing subprofile.

5. In the Subprofile Creation dialog box, enter an subprofile name, and then click
Next.

Tips
• Use a name that is as descriptive as possible.
• You can use an existing subprofile as a template to create a similar
subprofile. To do so, select the Copy from check box, and then choose
the respective subprofile.

6. Define the detailed configuration of the Input subprofile, and then click Finish.
For more information, see “Configuring input“ on page 63.

58 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
9.2. Creating a profile

7. Click Next.
8. In the Profile Creation dialog box, click Create to create a new Processing
subprofile.

Tip: You can use an existing subprofile.

9. In the Subprofile Creation dialog box, enter a subprofile name, and then click
Next.

Tips
• Use a name that is as descriptive as possible.
• You can use an existing subprofile as a template to create a similar
subprofile. To do so, select the Copy from check box, and then choose
the respective subprofile.
10. Define the detailed configuration of the Processing subprofile, and then click
Finish. For more information, see “Configuring processing“ on page 85.
11. Click Next.
12. In the Profile Creation dialog box, click Create to create a new Archiving
subprofile.

Tip: You can use an existing subprofile.

13. In the Subprofile Creation dialog box, enter a subprofile name, and then click
Next.

Tips
• Use a name that is as descriptive as possible.
• You can use an existing subprofile as a template to create a similar
subprofile. To do so, select the Copy from check box, and then choose
the respective subprofile.
14. Define the detailed configuration of the Archiving subprofile, and then click
Finish. For more information, see “Configuring indexing and archiving“
on page 127.
15. Click OK to complete the profile configuration.

Tip: The selected subprofiles are listed in the Page flow field.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 59


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 9 Working with profiles

16. Validate the profil. For more information, see “Validating profiles”
on page 61.

9.3 Modifying existing profiles


To modify existing profiles:

1. Open a profile:

• To modify any existing profile, click Profile > Manage Profiles.


• To modify the active profile, click Profile > Configure Current.
• To modify the active subprofile, click Profile > Configure Input, Configure
Processing, or Configure Archiving. Alternatively, click the respective
profile or subprofile button in the Profiles toolbar.
2. Modify the profile:

Create
Based on the tab Input, Processing, or Archiving, the Create button opens
the corresponding Subprofile Creation Wizard, where you can create a
new subprofile.
Modify
Select the subprofile you want to change. The functionality available here
depends on the tab you have open:
Input tab
Click Modify to change the input source. Select the correct input source
from the Scanners list in the Configure Input subprofile dialog box.
For more information, see “Configuring input“ on page 63.
To configure the parameters for the selected input source, click
Configure.
Processing and Archiving tab
Click Modify to change the settings and parameters of the selected
subprofile for Processing, and Archiving. For more information, see
“Configuring processing“ on page 85 and “Configuring indexing and
archiving“ on page 127.
Rename
Select the subprofile whose name you want to change, click Rename, and
then enter a new name for the subprofile.
Delete
Select the subprofile you want to remove, and then click Delete.

Notes

You cannot delete the active profile, which is marked with .
• You cannot delete a subprofile which is being used by a profile.

60 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
9.4. Validating profiles

Configure
Change the settings of the currently selected input device. It is only
available for the Input subprofile.

9.4 Validating profiles


To check the settings you have created for a profile:

1. Click Profile > Manage Profiles.

2. In the Profile Manager dialog box, select a profile, click Modify, and then click
Validate.
The Validation Result dialog box shows if the combination of subprofiles used
is valid. Comments beneath each subprofile offer hints for solving various
profile configuration problems.
For example, in the Processing subprofile, you cannot use Separate by Barcode
unless Barcode recognition is enabled first.

9.5 Working with different profiles


To switch between profiles:

• Click Profile > Switch to, and then select the profile you want to use.

To start Enterprise Scan with a preselected profile:

• Open Command Prompt, and then type EnterpriseScan.exe -p<profile


name>.

When you are regularly working with several profiles create Enterprise Scan
shortcuts on your desktop referring to different profiles. Thus you can work with the
preselected profile without switching profiles.

To start Enterprise Scan with a preselected Enterprise Scan shortcut:

• Create a shortcut for Enterprise Scan on the desktop, right-click it, select
Properties, and then enter <Path to the Enterprise Scan installation>
\EnterpriseScan.exe -p<profile name> in the Target field.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 61


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 10
Configuring input

As input media, you can choose between ISIS scanners, Kofax certified scanners,
External Storage, File Import, File Input, Lotus Notes, or Microsoft Exchange.

To configure input:

1. Click Profile > Manage Profiles.

2. In the Profile Manager dialog box, select the profile you want to configure, and
then click Modify.

3. In the Configure Profile dialog box, click the Input tab, select the subprofile,
and then click Modify.

4. In the Configure Input Subprofil dialog box, define the settings, and then click
OK.

Scanners
Select the input device for electronic pages to be scanned. Click Configure
to set the options for your scanning operation.

Note: If you select File Import as the input device, Configure is not
available.

Options

Note: Only supported options are displayed depending on the


selected scanner.

Check input file format


Checks the files before scanning. Click Properties to set the parameters
for checking. For more information, see “Configuring the format
checker” on page 64.

Do not create a new document


Adds the files to the last document. Otherwise the pages will be
scanned into a new document.

Note: Only supported for scanners as the input device.

Emulate dual stream mode


Enables the software emulated dual stream. For more information, see
“Dual stream scanning” on page 26 and “Viewing B/W mode”
on page 29. In the user interface, only monochrome images are
displayed.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 63


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 10 Configuring input

Note: If you select an ISIS scanner as the input device, this check
box is not available.

Transparent passthrough for PDF


Imports PDF files and archives the untouched PDF files to the selected
archive. Use this scenario if you want to preserve features within PDF
files like signature or password protection. The View view as well as
the Thumbnails view display first page of the Adobe Reader logo for
the PDF file. For more information, see “Viewing transparent PDF”
on page 29.
Transparent passthrough for PDF is available for every input device
that supports this feature. It is not available for a scanner or Kofax VRS.
For an external storage it is active by default and cannot be changed.
If Transparent passthrough for PDF is not selected the PDF is rendered
by Enterprise Scan during import and the rendered pages will be
archived. The original PDF data is lost. Alternatively you can also use
an external tool for rendering. For more information, see “Rendering
PDFs with an external tool“ on page 265.

10.1 Configuring the format checker


You can set parameters to run a check on the input file format.

Note: The fields that are active in this dialog box vary depending on the input
source you have selected.

Format Checker If Check input file format was activated in the Input subprofile and some scanned
Result documents do not fulfill the defined requirements, the Format Checker Result
dialog box opens.

Check if the listed pages are sorted into the right group and if you have selected the
right profile.

To configure the format checker:

1. Go to the profile you want to configure. For more information, see “Configuring
input“ on page 63.

2. Select the Check input file format check box, and then click Properties.

3. In the Configure Format Checker dialog box, define the settings, and then click
OK.

Check
Enter the minimum size in inches for X and Y values of the document
pages.

• Multipage tags searches for tags with multiple pages in the file, that is
tags that are significant for a TIFF file with multiple pages.

64 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
10.2. Configuring an external storage

• Compression enables file compression.

Fix

• Multipage tags fixes incorrect tags with multiple pages.


• Resolution in X and Resolution in Y replaces invalid resolution
information by the value entered in the fields.
• Photometric interpretation repairs files without information about
photometric interpretation. The value sets the color of the background. If
the scanned images are inverted, enabling this option and selecting the
correct color may fix the problem.

Directory for Bad Files


Path for the directory where files that cannot be repaired (bad files) will be
stored. You must have write permissions to this directory.

10.2 Configuring an external storage


Unlike in File Input, here, you can only read in pages that have been archived (or, in
this case, buffered) in this external storage from within Enterprise Scan. This is a
useful option if the processing of scanned documents is distributed among multiple
workstations. For example, the pages may be scanned at one workstation, while
quality control, cleaning, and sorting are performed at another workstation, and the
documents are archived at a third workstation.

Exporting to external storage creates the following folder structure on the file
system:
<configured folder>\<group name>\<serial number>\, for example C:
\extstorage\MyGroup\00000002.00000000\.

To configure an external storage:

1. Go to the profile you want to configure. For more information, see “Configuring
input“ on page 63.

2. In the Configure Input Subprofile dialog box, select External Storage, and then
click Configure.

3. In the Configure External Storage dialog box, define the settings, and then click
OK.

Registered External Storage


Displays a list of the external storage locations that have been created.
To define an external storage location as an input directory, click Register,
and then specify the directory in which the external storage is located. The
Name is only displayed if the registered external storage has been
configured as the document export target in the archiving subprofile. For
more information, see “Archiving to external storage” on page 178.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 65


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 10 Configuring input

Edit
Edits the path specification for the external storage.

Remove
Deletes the external storage location.

Delete images
Deletes the data in the directory after scanning.

Delete Group Folder


The Delete Group Folder check box is only enabled if the Delete images
check box is selected.
Choose one of the following options:

• Select the Delete Group Folder check box to delete the <group name>
folder after scanning.
• Clear the Delete Group Folder check box to delete only the files and
folders contained in the <group name> folder. The empty <group name>
folder will remain on the file system.

Example 10-1: Example for an external storage used for distributed


scanning

Your workload may be better balanced if you distribute it among multiple


workstations, since it is possible to separate the scanning, quality control,
and possibly the indexing. The workstations exchange the documents in
piles of documents, using an external storage.

In the typical scenario, there is a dedicated scan station equipped with a


high-performance scanner. The scan station converts paper documents into
electronic images and stores them, using the archiving command, into
temporary storage in the file system (external storage). The documents are
then read from external storage by checking stations, where the quality and
completeness of the documents are verified. Once they have been
successfully processed and indexed, the documents are archived from these
checking stations directly into the archive. The dedicated scan station which
has scanned the documents must also separate the documents into groups,
according to the number of operators doing the indexing and archiving in
the next step. This allows correct synchronization because each indexing
station gets exclusive access to one group.

66 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
10.3. Configuring file input

10.3 Configuring file input


You can read pages from a file or directory that is configured in the subprofile. You
can import all supported image formats and PDF files. Further automatic processing
is possible according to the configured profile.

Importing PDF You can import PDF files from the file system in two ways:
files
• Rendering PDF files to bitmap. Each page of the PDF file is converted to a bitmap
and handled downstream in the same way as the pages of a document would
have been scanned in the first place.
• Passing the original PDF through. Each PDF file is passed though Enterprise
Scan without being touched at all. For more information, see Transparent
passthrough for PDF on page 64.

Warning

The scanned documents are not locked. This means that this input source
cannot be used for scenarios where concurrent users are scanning from the
same network file share because there is a high risk that they import the same
document more than once.

To configure file input:

1. Go to the profile you want to configure. For more information, see “Configuring
input“ on page 63.

2. In the Configure Input Subprofile dialog box, select File Input, and then click
Configure.

3. In the Configure File Input dialog box, define the settings, and then click OK.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 67


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 10 Configuring input

Root directory for scanning


Directory in which the files are located.

Scan Options

Scan files from root


Scans files that are located directly in the root directory.

Scan files from subdirectories


Scans files from the subdirectories of the specified root directory.

Delete scanned files, Delete emptied subdirectories


Deletes the original files or emptied subdirectories automatically after
scanning.
Delete emptied subdirectories is only performed if Delete scanned
files and Scan files from subdirectories are also selected.

Warning
You will lose original data if the original image is in the wrong
format or if the processing subprofile indicates an error because it
cannot handle the current color depth of the scanned page. In
these cases a message is displayed and the original files on the
disk are then deleted without warning irrespective from the
success or failure of scanning.

Note: The subdirectories are not empty if they contain any files,
for example thumbs.db, or desktop.ini. These files are only
visible to the Windows user selecting the Show hidden files,
folders, and drives setting in the Folder Options.
In case a subdirectory deletion failed, see the log file.

• If the subdirectories are not empty the log message is


FolderDeletion: skipped.
• If a file or directory is opened in Windows Explorer the log
message is FolderDeletion: failed.

For more information about log files, see “Enterprise Scan log
files” on page 225.

Document Options

Create new document for directory


Creates a new document for every subdirectory contained in with the
directory specified under Root directory.

Filename as document index


Uses the file name of the first file in the directory as the index for the
document.

68 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
10.4. Configuring file import

File Selection

Image files
Selects only image files.

Image and PDF files


Selects only image and PDF files.

All files
Selects all files.

10.4 Configuring file import


You can import documents by selecting the files explicitly during scanning. You can
import all supported image formats and PDF files. Further automatic processing is
possible according to the configured profile.

Note: The language of the Open dialog box where you select the files depends
on the installed operating system and may differ from the Enterprise Scan
language.

To configure file import:

1. Go to the profile you want to configure. For more information, see “Configuring
input“ on page 63.

2. In the Configure Input Subprofile dialog box, select File Import, and then click
OK.

10.5 Configuring ISIS scanners


When working with ISIS scanners, all installed scanners that are available are
marked with a green scanner icon in the Configure Input Subprofile dialog box.

Note: Each ISIS driver supports one or more scanners. Install the relevant
driver only.

To configure ISIS scanners:

1. Go to the profile you want to configure. For more information, see “Configuring
input“ on page 63.

2. In the Configure Input Subprofile dialog box, select your scanner, and then
click Configure.

3. In the Configure ISIS Scanner dialog box, click the tab you want to change,
define the settings, and then click OK.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 69


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 10 Configuring input

Common rules, valid for all fields in the Configure ISIS Scanner dialog box

• Your changes are immediately validated for all controls except edit
boxes. For edit boxes, the value is checked when the focus is moved to
another box.
• There can be dependencies between scanning parameters. This means
that if you change one value, other values may automatically change to
make the whole configuration valid. Also, the available options for a
parameter may be limited by the current value of other parameters. For
example, you can select Compression only if 1bit B&W color depth is
selected.
• Default resets the fields on the active tab only.

Standard tabs
The Page and Image tabs set the parameters for the paper format and image
quality options. For more information, see “Configuring Page settings for
ISIS scanners” on page 70 and “Configuring Image settings for ISIS
scanners” on page 72.

Optional tabs
The Advanced and Endorser tabs as well as special tabs for some scanners
may also appear. These tabs are only available if the driver supports at least
one of the corresponding parameters. For more information, see
“Configuring Advanced settings for ISIS scanners” on page 74,
“Configuring Endorser settings for ISIS scanners” on page 75,
“Configuring Driver settings for ISIS scanners” on page 79, “Configuring
All Settings for ISIS scanners” on page 79, “Configuring Kodak special
tab” on page 80 and “Configuring Fujitsu IPC tab” on page 80.

10.5.1 Configuring Page settings for ISIS scanners


In the Page tab, you can select the paper source and the size and offset of the region
that you want to scan.

Note: The options available depend on the functions supported by the scanner
you are using.

To configure Page settings for ISIS scanners:

1. Go to the scanner you want to configure. For more information, see “To
configure ISIS scanners:“ on page 69.

2. In the Configure ISIS Scanner dialog box, click the Page tab, define the
settings, and then click OK.

Paper Source

Flatbed
Scans each page individually from the Flatbed scanner.

70 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
10.5. Configuring ISIS scanners

Automatic
Scans pages automatically, that is if there is a stack of paper pages in the
feeder, they will all be scanned as single-sided. If there is no paper
stack, one image from the flatbed scanner will be scanned.

Feeder (multiple pages)


Scans pages from the scanner's stack Feeder.

Timeout
Sets the length of time in seconds that the scanner can wait for
another document without interrupting the scanning operation.
The feeder timeout parameter should be set in scenarios where the
scanner itself does not implement any timeout threshold. That is for
scenarios with “manual feed” or for any related types of scanning
where sheets are not fed continuously but need a certain break to
insert the next sheet.

Note: Set the timeout to 0 in the following cases:


• The scanner itself implements some timeout threshold.
• Your scanning scenario does not require any timeout
threshold at all.

Double-sided scanning
Specifies if you want to scan both sides of a document.

Show device dialog


Displays the Configure Device Settings dialog box in following cases:

• Once per scan session, on the first scanning.


• If you switch to another input device (profile) and then switch back to
the ISIS input device, once, on the first scanning.
• When you click Configure for the ISIS scanner.

Define the settings in the Configure Device Settings dialog box.

Selected Device
Select the scanner id from the list if you have multiple scanners
attached to the computer.

Rescan Bus button


Updates the list of attached scanners.

Default Page Size


Sets the default page size for scanning.

Dual Stream Option

None
The dual stream is disabled. Default setting.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 71


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 10 Configuring input

Emulated by software
The dual stream is similar to the Emulate dual stream mode option for
non-ISIS input devices in the Configure Input dialog box. For more
information, see “Configuring input“ on page 63.

Note: The Emulated by software button is only available if the


image color depth is 24-bit color and the compression is not set to
None. For more information, see “Configuring Image settings for
ISIS scanners” on page 72.

Hardware
The dual stream is provided by the scanner.

Note: The Hardware button is only available if the image color


depth is 24-bit color, the compression is not set to None, and the
scanner hardware supports Multi Streaming.

For more information, see “Dual stream scanning” on page 26.

Page

Paper Size
Specifies the settings for Page format, Orientation, Width, Height, Left
and Top offset.

Advanced
Set Border detection to On to recognize page borders and to determine
the Page format. This check box can be selected only if the scanner
supports this function.
Select the Deskew check box to deskew the page. With some scanners,
this check box can be selected only if Border detection is set to On.
Enter a size in Overscan to enlarge the scanning area by the specified
size. You can, for example, select A4 size with a 5 mm safety margin.

10.5.2 Configuring Image settings for ISIS scanners


In the Image tab, you specify the basic properties of the images that are to be
produced.

Note: The options available depend on the functions supported by the scanner
you are using.

To configure Image settings for ISIS scanners:

1. Go to the scanner you want to configure. For more information, see “To
configure ISIS scanners:“ on page 69.

2. In the Configure ISIS Scanner dialog box, click the Image tab, define the
settings, and then click OK.

72 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
10.5. Configuring ISIS scanners

Image Format
Color depth
Color depth options depend on the color settings that are supported by
the selected scanner.

Note: Scanning with a large number of colors requires a powerful


computer with a large amount of memory. In order to take full
advantage of the memory OpenText recommends that you work
with a 64-bit operation system.

Resolution
Sets the resolution. The higher the selected resolution, the better the
result. However, at high resolutions, scanning takes longer and requires
more storage space. Since this setting depends on the quality of pages
that are to be scanned, you must test the settings to find which one
provides the best results. OpenText recommends that you use 300 dpi
for black and white scanning and 150 dpi for color or grayscale
scanning.

Brightness
The greater the percentage value you select, the lighter the electronic page
will appear. If Automatic is selected, the optimized setting for the scanner is
used, but only if the scanner supports this function.

Contrast
Sets the contrast. The greater the percentage value you select, the higher the
contrast in the electronic page.
Advanced

Dithering
Switches the dithering mode and can turn dithering off. Dithering
improves the quality of pictures in 1-bit monochromatic mode but may
damage text or barcodes.
Compression
Sets the type of compression used when images are transferred from the
scanner to the application. For fast scanners, this may influence the
speed of the whole scanning process. The most suitable compression
setting depends on the overall profile configuration.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 73


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 10 Configuring input

10.5.3 Configuring Advanced settings for ISIS scanners


In the Advanced tab, you specify special scanning options that can be selected if
supported by the scanner.

Note: The options available depend on the functions supported by the scanner
you are using.

To configure Advanced settings for ISIS scanners:

1. Go to the scanner you want to configure. For more information, see “To
configure ISIS scanners:“ on page 69.
2. In the Configure ISIS Scanner dialog box, click the Advanced tab, define the
settings, and then click OK.

Emphasis
Enhances the image.
White level follower
Compensates for a non-white background.
Invert image
Inverts the color of each pixel in the image.
Outline extraction
Makes edges black while leaving monochrome areas white.
Mixed scan
Optimizes scanning for pages containing both images and text.
Error Handling: Prompt scanner internal error during scanning
When an internal error occurs inside the scanner during scanning, Enterprise
Scan will display an error message along with the error code. Select this check
box to enable these error messages. By default, the check box is selected.
If you clear this check box, the user will not be notified of an internal error inside
the scanner during scanning. Scanning will be aborted silently.

Example: The following screenshot shows an error message when a paper jam has
occurred in the scanner feeder.

You can enable a retry option for any scanner error during scanning by creating a
registry entry.

74 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
10.5. Configuring ISIS scanners

To enable a retry option for scanner errors:

1. Create a S:ErrorCodes (Type: String) registry entry under HKEY_CURRENT_USER


\Software\IXOS\IXOS_ARCHIVE\6.0\Scan\HKLM\ScanGlobalSettings.

2. Add the error codes for which you want to enable a retry option.
In the example above, to enable a retry option in case of paper jam, enter the
value -4426 for S:ErrorCodes. If you want retry option for multiple errors,
separate the error codes by a semicolon.

Example: The following screenshot shows the paper jam error message with the error code
added in the registry.

To continue scanning, clear the paper jam, and then click Retry. To abort the scanning
operation, click Cancel.

For all errors whose error code is not added in the registry, only the OK option will
be available in the error message.

10.5.4 Configuring Endorser settings for ISIS scanners


Enterprise Scan supports following endorser functionalities:

• Scanner with hardware imprinter: Using a printer unit of the scanner to print
some text on the sheets being scanned. For more information, see “Configuring
Endorser settings for ISIS scanners” on page 75.
• Scanner with software endorser: Using the endorser functionality of the scanner
driver to add some overlay text to the image before sending it to the scanning
application. For more information, see “Configuring Endorser settings for ISIS
scanners” on page 75 and “Configuring Driver settings for ISIS scanners”
on page 79.
• Enterprise Scan performing software imprinting: Adding overlay text as
configured in the processing subprofile. For more information, see “Configuring
software imprinter” on page 108.

In the Endorser tab, you specify the stamp settings for your ISIS scanner.

Note: The options available depend on the functions supported by the scanner
you are using.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 75


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 10 Configuring input

To configure Endorser settings for ISIS scanners:

1. Go to the scanner you want to configure. For more information, see “To
configure ISIS scanners:“ on page 69.

2. In the Configure ISIS Scanner dialog box, click the Endorser tab, define the
settings, and then click OK.

Mode
Specifies how the stamp is printed.

Disabled
No stamp is printed.

Manual
No stamp is printed during scanning. However, you can enter a stamp
identification manually by using the Properties view. You can use the
manual setting for pages that have already been time stamped.

Automatic
Prints the stamp automatically on every scanned page.

Automatic Counter
This counter increases by 1 after every page that is scanned. To change the
value used for the next page, enter the value into the field.

Endorser string
Defines the printed appearance of the endorser.

Note: Do not configure endorser functionality using ISIS native


dialogs and shift trick. Use Enterprise Scan only to configure scanner
specific tags.

The endorser string may consist of:

• Static text, for example “test”.


• Format specifier that requires a one-time expansion by Enterprise Scan,
for example %u.
• Format specifier that requires a dynamic expansion by Enterprise Scan
for every single page, for example %t or %n.
• Format specifier that are expanded by the scanner itself, either one-time
or dynamic, for example %Y or %S.

Tips
• You can use the scanner specifier apart from the Enterprise
Scan specifier.
• The performance will not be reduced even in case of using the
dynamic specifier.

76 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
10.5. Configuring ISIS scanners

• The Enterprise Scan specifier will take more priority if you use
it together with the scanner specifier.

Supported format specifier:


%c

• Type: Static
• Interpretation: Computer Name
• Performance: Unaffected

%C

• Type: Static
• Interpretation: Computer Name
• Performance: Unaffected

%d

• Type: Static
• Interpretation: The current date.
• Performance: Unaffected

%D

• Type: Static
• Interpretation: The current date.
• Performance: Unaffected

%n

• Type: Dynamic
• Interpretation: Counter of pages.
• Performance: Reduced

Tip: OpenText recommends that you use %S for faster scanning if


this format specifier is supported by your scanner.

%N

• Type: Dynamic
• Interpretation: Counter of pages.
• Performance: Reduced

Tip: OpenText recommends that you use %S for faster scanning if


this format specifier is supported by your scanner.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 77


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 10 Configuring input

%P

• Type: Static
• Interpretation: Use driver endorser string settings.
• Performance: Unaffected - depending on driver settings.

Notes
• You cannot combine this format specifier with any other format
specifiers.
• %P has the same function as an empty string.

%t

• Type: Dynamic
• Interpretation: The current time.
• Performance: Reduced because also seconds will be evaluated.

%T

• Type: Dynamic
• Interpretation: The current time.
• Performance: Unaffected but not accurate.

%u

• Type: Static
• Interpretation: The current user name.
• Performance: Unaffected

%U

• Type: Static
• Interpretation: The current user name.
• Performance: Unaffected

Example 10-2: Endorser string


Using %T %u %n means:

• Enterprise Scan will expand %u and pass %T robert %n to the


scanner.
• The scanner will expand %T and %n and prints 20150523
robert 0100, 20120523 robert 0101 and so on, on the scanned
pages.

78 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
10.5. Configuring ISIS scanners

Position
Specifies the position of the stamp on the page relative to the margins.

10.5.5 Configuring Driver settings for ISIS scanners


In the Driver tab, you specify the drivers settings for your ISIS scanner.

Note: This tab is visible for administrators only. Users with the appropriate
permission can display the tab by simultaneously pressing the SHIFT key while
opening ISIS configuration. To change permissions, see “Changing
permissions“ on page 197.

To configure Driver settings for ISIS scanners:

1. Go to the scanner you want to configure. For more information, see “To
configure ISIS scanners:“ on page 69.

2. In the Configure ISIS Scanner dialog box, click the Driver tab, define the
settings, and then click OK.

Driver Settings
Defines the settings for the selected driver by entering the device name in
the Select Device field and choosing the properties to be ignored in the
Property not used list.

ScannerID
Select the ScannerID in the list.

Native ISIS dialog boxes


Use Standard, More, and Area to open the native ISIS dialog boxes.

10.5.6 Configuring All Settings for ISIS scanners


In the All Settings tab, you specify all other available settings for the ISIS scanner.
This tab is intended to only be used in support cases. For more information, contact
OpenText Global Technical Services.

Note: This tab is hidden by default and is displayed by simultaneously


pressing the SHIFT key while opening ISIS configuration. Only administrators
should define these settings.

To configure All Settings settings for ISIS scanners:

1. Go to the scanner you want to configure. For more information, see “To
configure ISIS scanners:“ on page 69.

2. In the Configure ISIS Scanner dialog box, click the All Settings tab, define the
settings, and then click OK.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 79


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 10 Configuring input

10.5.7 Configuring Kodak special tab


In the Kodak tab, you specify special options for Kodak scanners if supported by the
scanner. For more information, refer to the manual for the Kodak scanner.

To configure Kodak special settings for ISIS scanners:

1. Go to the scanner you want to configure. For more information, see “To
configure ISIS scanners:“ on page 69.

2. In the Configure ISIS Scanner dialog box, click the Kodak special tab, define
the settings, and then click OK.

Manual feed
Controls the automatic feeder. If enabled, the user must press a button on
the scanner before each page.

Skew stop
Stops the scanning when a skewed sheet of paper is detected.

Adaptive thresholding
Adapts the threshold to optimize scanning.

Invert image
Inverts the color of each pixel in the image.

10.5.8 Configuring Fujitsu IPC tab


In the Fujitsu IPC tab, you specify special options for Fujitsu scanners with an IPC
board if supported by the scanner. For more information, refer to the manual for the
Fujitsu scanner.

To configure Fujitsu IPC settings for ISIS scanners:

1. Go to the scanner you want to configure. For more information, see “To
configure ISIS scanners:“ on page 69.

2. In the Configure ISIS Scanner dialog box, click the Fujitsu IPC tab, define the
settings, and then click OK.

Threshold
Increases the accuracy of low-contrast documents.

Gradation
Specifies the gamma correction in Auto I mode.

Smoothing
Adjusts character edges to improve Optical Character Recognition (OCR).

Variance rate
Adjusts the level of gray at which the pixel is regarded as being black or
white. It enables the automatic brightness option.

80 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
10.6. Configuring Kofax certified scanners and VirtualReScan

10.6 Configuring Kofax certified scanners and


VirtualReScan
Enterprise Scan supports Kofax certified scanners by using the ImageControls toolkit.
This integration offers high-volume scanning, automated recognition, and image
cleanup.

Installed Kofax certified scanners are listed in the Scanners list of the Input
subprofile. They are marked with a purple icon.

Initialization of the Kofax certified scanner driver is started automatically when you
start scanning or configuring the scanner for the first time. A dialog box showing the
initialization progress opens. If the driver supports VirtualReScan (VRS), the VRS
icon appears in the Windows taskbar.

To configure Kofax certified scanners:

1. Go to the profile you want to configure. For more information, see “Configuring
input“ on page 63.

2. In the Configure Input Subprofile dialog box, select your Kofax certified
scanner, and then click Configure.

Tip: Instead of using a Kofax certified scanner you can also select a Kofax-
VRS Scanner. This generic scanner can be assigned a physical scanner
using the Kofax scanner configuration tool. The generic scanner also uses
the ISIS configuration dialog.

3. In the Configure ISIS Scanner dialog box, click the tab you want to change,
define the settings, and then click OK.
For a description of the values, refer to the Kofax documentation.

VirtualReScan (VRS) is an electronic checkpoint for scanned images. As quickly as


images pass through the scanner, VRS performs a multi-point inspection of each
document. VRS instantly checks and adjusts for alignment (skew), brightness,
contrast, and image clarity. Any inconsistencies are immediately corrected by VRS
so that only the straightest, most readable images are moved into your application.
VRS can be inserted between the scanner and the interface of Enterprise Scan.
Enterprise Scan receives the images directly from the scanner or through VRS. This
is transparent for Enterprise Scan.

To configure VirtualReScan:

• Right-click the VRS icon in the taskbar, and then select Preview or click
Advanced in the Scanner Properties dialog box.
The language of the Scanner Properties dialog box depends on the installed
scanner driver and may differ from the Enterprise Scan language.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 81


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 10 Configuring input

The VRS settings are independent from the scanner's settings. They are not
handled by Enterprise Scan but by the VRS engine. For more information on
VRS settings, refer to the VRS documentation.

Notes
• The VRS profile selected in Enterprise Scan must be available on the scan
computer. If you download the configuration to another computer with VRS
you must install the VRS profile on this computer too because it is not part of
the Enterprise Scan configuration. If the requested VRS profile is not
available on the computer a default configuration is used by VRS.
• Switching the profile in the context menu of the VRS notification does not
apply to Enterprise Scan. Whenever you start a scan the configuration is
updated by Enterprise Scan, that is the VRS profile is explicitly set to the
Enterprise Scan input profile settings. If you want to use different VRS
profiles in Enterprise Scan you must create corresponding input subprofiles
in Enterprise Scan and use them to switch to another VRS profile.

10.7 Configuring fax input


Enterprise Scan can read in faxes received from Lotus Notes, Microsoft Exchange, or
any software that supports this interface, such as Faxination. You can also, for
example, use software that can export received faxes from email to Microsoft
Exchange.

10.7.1 Configuring fax input for Lotus Notes


To configure fax input for Lotus Notes:

1. Go to the profile you want to configure. For more information, see “Configuring
input“ on page 63.
2. Select Lotus Notes in the Configure Input Subprofile dialog box, and then
click Configure.
3. In the Lotus Notes Properties dialog box, define where the faxes will arrive:

Lotus Notes server, Mail database


Displays the Lotus Notes server and Mail database to be used. Values are
taken from the Lotus Notes Client configuration and cannot be changed.
Remember user ID password, User ID password
Select the Remember user ID password check box and enter the password
for the mailbox. Users will not have to enter a password for the mailbox
every time the Lotus Notes server is contacted.
Folders
If you want to change the default names, enter new names for the folders in
the Input, Error, and Deleted boxes. When Enterprise Scan retrieves new
fax messages, these three folders are automatically created in the Folders
folder of your mailbox directory, if they have not already been created.

82 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
10.7. Configuring fax input

Note: Scanning fax attachments from Lotus Notes is only possible


from the Folders folder. The automatic creation places the folders at
the correct location.

E-mail search engine


You can enter criteria both for the Subject field and for the Body text. Only
incoming emails that match these criteria will be shown in the Received
faxes list in the Scan from Lotus Notes dialog box.

10.7.2 Configuring fax input for Microsoft Exchange


Note: Microsoft Windows must be configured to use Microsoft Outlook as the
default email client.

To configure fax input for Microsoft Exchange:

1. Go to the profile you want to configure. For more information, see “Configuring
input“ on page 63.

2. Select Microsoft Exchange in the Configure Input Subprofile dialog box, and
then click Configure.

3. In the Microsoft Exchange Properties dialog box, define where the faxes will
arrive:

Microsoft Outlook profile


Select the Microsoft Outlook profile to be used.

Note: This must correspond to the mailbox that receives incoming


faxes.

Folders
If you want to change the default names, enter new names for the folders in
the Input, Error, and Deleted boxes. When Enterprise Scan retrieves new
fax messages, these three folders are automatically created in the Folders
folder of your mailbox directory, if they have not already been created.

Note: Scanning fax attachments from Microsoft Outlook is only


possible from the FaxLink folders located directly at the root of the
mailbox, at the same level as Calendar, Contacts, and Deleted Items.
The automatic creation places the folders at the correct location.

E-mail search engine


You can enter criteria both for the Subject field and for the Body text. Only
incoming emails that match these criteria will be shown in the Received
faxes list in the Scan from Exchange dialog box.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 83


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 11

Configuring processing

Processing can include, for example barcode recognition, separation by filename,


folder creation, scripting extension, or classification by user.

To configure processing:

1. Click Profile > Manage Profiles.

2. In the Profile Manager dialog box, select the profile you want to configure, and
then click Modify.

3. In the Configure Profile dialog box, click the Processing tab, select the
subprofile, and then click Modify.
The Configure Processing Subprofile dialog box is divided into the following
parts:

Page Processing
Page processing improves the legibility of the document. Usually, page
processing is performed automatically during the scanning operation.
However, it might be necessary to improve the document quality manually.
For more information, see “Configuring page processing” on page 86.

Document Creation
During mass scanning, the beginning of a new document must be detected
automatically. This can be done in various ways: From a barcode, blank
pages, the page number, or blank pages.
For more information, see “Separating documents (document creation)”
on page 110.

Batch Creation or Assignment or Folder Creation or Assignment


You can use batches and folders to build a hierarchical structure of your
documents, with batches as the highest level and folders located below
batches.
For more information, see “Configuring batch and folder creation or
assignment” on page 115.

Document Processing
If you are using blank pages to detect the end of a document, the obsolete
blank pages can be removed automatically during scanning.
For more information, see “Removing blank pages” on page 120.
The scripting extension enables you to configure document processing,
using a script.
For more information, see “Scripting extension” on page 120.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 85


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 11 Configuring processing

Document Classification
During mass scanning, the documents can be separated automatically into
document groups. This can be done using a barcode, default group or patch
code.
For more information, see “Configuring document classification”
on page 121.

4. Add the operation you want to use to the Flow list, and then click Configure.
For more information, see the appropriate section in “Configuring processing“
on page 85.

5. Click OK.

11.1 Configuring page processing


Page processing improves the legibility of the document. In most cases the page
processing is performed automatically during the scanning operation. But in rare
cases, it might be necessary to improve the document quality manually.

You can select following methods of page processing:

2D Barcode Recognition
Use to separate documents, assign documents to a batch or a folder, or classify
documents by 2D barcode. For more information, see “Configuring 2D barcode
recognition” on page 88.

Barcode Recognition
Use to separate documents, assign documents to a batch or a folder, or classify
documents by barcode. For more information, see “Configuring barcode
recognition” on page 91.

Black Border
Use when you are using the deskew or crop function. Works only with black
and white images. For more information, see “Configuring black border”
on page 95.

Blank Page Detection


Use to remove blank pages inserted as separators. For more information, see
“Configuring blank page detection” on page 96.

Content Extractor (Color)


Use to convert images from color to black and white. This step may be helpful if
the incoming documents are in color and you often print them on black and
white printers. This only works over color images; gray scale images must be
converted to color first. For more information, see “Configuring content
extractor (color)” on page 96.

Content Extractor with Preview


Use to convert color images to black and white. The user can interactively select
a threshold value. Pixels brighter than the threshold are set to white while others
are set to black. The manual validation rule, which is not to be used for flow,

86 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
11.1. Configuring page processing

works only with color images. For more information, see “Configuring content
extractor with preview (manual processing only)” on page 98.

Note: This function is intended to be used manually for postprocessing


corrections on scanned pages. Therefore, it cannot be set in the process
flow.

Conversion to <number> Colors


Use to reduce the size of the resulting images by reducing the number of colors
in the image. This is a compromise and depends on the specific scenario. For
more information, see “Configuring color conversion” on page 99.
Conversion to Gray Scale
Use to convert color pages into scaled grays. This saves archive space and
improves the legibility of converted pages. For more information, see
“Configuring conversion to gray scale” on page 100.
Crop Filter
Use to detect the image size, remove the black and white borders, and then save
the reduced image. For more information, see “Configuring the crop filter”
on page 100.
OCR
Use to scan the contents of a picture file into editable text. For more information,
see “Configuring OCR (Optical Character Recognition)” on page 104.

Note: OCR is only available in the Operations list if the deprecated OCR
feature is installed separately.

DPI Resampling
Use to change the resolution of an image, for example when pages are noisy and
Barcode or Patch Code Recognition is used. For more information, see
“Configuring DPI resampling” on page 101.
Deskew
Use to deskew skewed images. Works only with black and white images. For
more information, see “Configuring deskew” on page 101.
Despeckle (B&W)
Use to correct dirty black/white pages. Works only with black and white images.
For more information, see “Configuring despeckle (B&W)” on page 103.
Landscape to Portrait
Use to rotate odd pages left and even pages right. If you have a duplex A3
scanner and are scanning A4 pages, you can speed up the scanning by rotating
the A4 pages to landscape. This function is able to correctly convert the scanned
landscapes to original portraits. For more information, see “Configuring
landscape to portrait” on page 104.
Patch Code Recognition
Use to separate or classify documents by Patch Code. For more information, see
“Configuring patch code recognition” on page 105.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 87


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 11 Configuring processing

Quality Indicator
Use to automatically check the image quality during scanning. If an image does
not meet the quality requirements, the page is marked with the Bad Quality
Marker. The scan operator can then search for the Bad Quality Marker and
manually correct the quality, if possible. This operation is only supported by
OpenText Capture Center. For more information, see “Configuring quality
indicator” on page 106.

Rotation
In mass scanning scenarios, it may not always be possible to scan the documents
in the correct orientation. This function rotates these pages automatically. For
more information, see “Configuring rotation” on page 107.

Smooth (Color)
Use to correct dirty color pages. Works only with color images. For more
information, see “Configuring smooth (color)” on page 107.

Software Imprinter
Use to imprint information on your scanned documents. For more information,
see “Configuring software imprinter” on page 108.

11.1.1 Configuring 2D barcode recognition


You can use 2D Barcode Recognition to separate documents, assign documents to a
batch or a folder, or classify documents by 2D barcode.

Notes

• 2D Barcode Recognition must be set in the flow preceding the document


separation, assignment, or classification.
• 2D barcode recognition must be licensed separately. For license information,
contact Inlite Research (http://www.inliteresearch.com/opentext).
• To distinguish simple barcodes from 2D barcodes, the term “barcode”
always indicates the simple barcode whereas the term “2D barcode” always
indicates the 2-dimensional barcode.

Barcode

88 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
11.1. Configuring page processing

2D Barcode

To configure 2D barcode recognition:

1. Go to the profile you want to configure. For more information, see “To
configure processing:“ on page 85.

2. Add 2D Barcode Recognition to the flow list, and then click Configure.

3. Define the settings, and then click OK.

Barcodes tab
Enterprise Scan supports the following types of 2D barcodes:

Pdf417

Pdf417 is a stacked linear barcode symbol format. The 417 signifies


that each pattern in the code consists of 4 bars and spaces, and that
each pattern is 17 units long. The information to be encoded can be
text, binary or numeric data.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 89


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 11 Configuring processing

Data Matrix

Information is encoded horizontally and vertically in a matrix. The


matrix stores more information per square unit than simple barcodes.
The information to be encoded can be text or raw data. The length of
the encoded data depends on the symbol dimension used.

QR

A QR (Quick Response) barcode is a type of matrix barcode. The


code consists of black modules arranged in a square pattern on a
white background. The information encoded can be made up of any
kind of data.

Recognize barcodes
Defines the barcodes that you want to search for.

Checksum
Examines the checksums of the recognized barcodes. For more information
on checksums, see “Questions about barcodes” on page 296.

Licence
Indicates the license for the 2D barcode recognition. If you select a 2D
barcode without having an appropriate license, a warning message is
displayed.

Move Up/Move Down


Changes the sequence in which the barcodes are checked during scanning.

Configure tab

Restrict area for recognition


Specifies the area to be checked for barcode recognition. You must
configure the area set before you can select it here. For more information,
see “Defining areas for recognition“ on page 193.

Recognize all barcodes on page


Considers all 2D barcodes located on a page.

Recognize from B/W copy


Recognizes 2D barcodes from a B/W copy.

90 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
11.1. Configuring page processing

Find poor quality and damaged barcodes (lower performance)


Recognizes 2D barcodes that are of poor quality or damaged. This option
reduces the performance of the 2D barcode recognition.

Barcode orientation
Defines the orientation of the 2D barcodes on your paper. Enterprise Scan
needs this information for correct reading of 2D barcodes. The following
values are possible:

• Diagonal (+– 45 degrees; lower performance)


• Horizontal
• Vertical

11.1.2 Configuring barcode recognition


You can use Barcode Recognition to separate documents, assign documents to a
batch or a folder, or classify documents by barcode.

Notes
• Barcode Recognition must be set in the flow preceding the document
separation, assignment, or classification.
• To distinguish simple barcodes from 2D barcodes, the term “barcode”
always indicates the simple barcode whereas the term “2D barcode” always
indicates the 2-dimensional barcode.

Barcode

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 91


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 11 Configuring processing

2D Barcode

To configure barcode recognition:

1. Go to the profile you want to configure. For more information, see “To
configure processing:“ on page 85.
2. Add Barcode Recognition to the flow list, and then click Configure.
3. Define the settings, and then click OK.

Barcodes tab

Tip: To select all barcodes, press SHIFT, and then select one of the
check boxes.

Enterprise Scan supports the following standard types of barcodes only:

• 2/5 Datalogic
• 2/5 IATA
• 2/5 Industrial
• 2/5 Interleaved
• 2/5 Inverted
• 2/5 Matrix
• Code11 Matrix
• Code32
• Code39 Standard
• Code93
• Code128
• ABC-Codabar
• BCD
• Codabar
• EAN128

92 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
11.1. Configuring page processing

• EAN13
• EAN8
• JAN-13
• JAN-8
• MSI
• Plessey
• UPC Version A
• UPC Version E

Recognize barcodes
Select the barcodes that you want to search for.

Checksum
Uses the checksum function of the barcode: The checksum is read and
checked.
If the checkbox is selected, the checksum is checked.
For more information on checksums, see “Questions about barcodes”
on page 296.

Remove checksum
Defines the processing of the checksum after check.
If the checkbox is selected, the checksum sign is removed.
If the checkbox is not selected, the checksum sign remains in the barcode.

Regular expression
Defines a regular expression against which the index is checked.

Note: The strings, rules, and separators should correspond to the


conventions of the UNIX programming language. For examples of
possible entries, see “Working with regular expressions“ on page 273.

Remove chars
Removes certain characters or strings from the index in accordance to the
rules entered in this box. For example, to remove the first four characters
enter 1-4. To remove the first and the fourth character enter 1,4.

Move Up/Move Down


Changes the sequence in which the barcodes are checked during scanning.

More Info
Displays a technical specification of the selected barcode.

Configure tab

Restrict area for recognition


Specifies the area to be checked for barcode recognition. You must
configure the area set before you can select it. For more information, see
“Defining areas for recognition“ on page 193.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 93


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 11 Configuring processing

Recognize all barcodes on page


Considers all 2D barcodes located on a page.
Recognize horizontal barcodes first
This option is available if you have selected From top or From bottom as
the barcode orientation.
Examines horizontally placed barcodes first. Otherwise, the first barcode to
be detected on the page is recognized as the first barcode. This option is
important if only one barcode is to be recognized even though various
barcodes may be present on the page.
Recognize barcodes on noisy ground (lower performance)
Recognizes barcodes even on pages with noisy background. This option
reduces the performance of the barcode recognition.
Barcode orientation
Defines the orientation of the barcodes on your paper. Enterprise Scan
needs this information to correctly read barcodes.
Recognize rotated barcodes (+- 45°; lower performance)
Recognizes barcodes that were placed at an angle and would normally
not be recognized.

Recognition tab
You can change the settings to enhance recognition of the individual barcodes.

Note: The values for recognition are measured in millimeters divided by


one hundred (mm/100).

Quiet space width


Defines the horizontal distance between a barcode and its surrounding text,
and graphics. If this value is reduced, barcodes located closer to the border
or text are also recognized.
Scan for barcode every
Defines the search interval for barcodes. If you reduce this value, a lower
resolution is used. Therefore, even very small barcodes can be found.
Distance of compared lines
Defines the distance for comparison above and below the barcode. You can
reduce this value to prevent the comparison from being performed too far
above or below the barcode. If a possible barcode is found in a line, which is
white space to edge and black bars, this line is compared with the lines
above and below.
Comparison attempts
Defines the frequency at which comparisons are performed. The higher the
value, the more precise the result.
Comparison tolerance
Defines the maximum horizontal distance between the lines to be
compared.

94 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
11.1. Configuring page processing

Minimum number of characters in the code


Defines the minimum number of characters that the code must contain
before it can be registered as a barcode.

Comparison shift
Defines the maximum horizontal shift of the lines that are to be compared.
Increasing this value improves the recognition of oblique or less legible
barcodes.

Bad lines to stop smoothing


Checks whether the upper and lower located lines match. Increasing this
value results in a greater tolerance threshold during this check, which may
in turn lead to better results in case of oblique barcodes.

Maximum bar width


Sets the maximum width a bar can have if it is to be recognized as part of a
barcode.

Minimum bar width


Sets the minimum width a bar can have if it is to be recognized as part of a
barcode.

Minimum barcode height


Sets the minimum height of a stripe if it is to be recognized as a barcode.
This value prevents graphics, characters, badly scanned lines, or dirty areas
from being incorrectly identified as a barcode.

Ignore barcode-like patterns


Ignores patterns that look similar to a barcode.

Skip duplicates
Compares the identified barcodes. If two identical barcodes appear on a
page, then only one is considered.

Default, Low Quality, Poor Quality


Sets the quality of the recognition to predefined values.

11.1.3 Configuring black border


You can use Black Border when you are using the deskew or crop function. Works
only with black and white images.

To configure black border detection:

1. Go to the profile you want to configure. For more information, see “To
configure processing:“ on page 85.

2. Add Black Border to the flow list, and then click Configure.

3. Define the settings, and then click OK.

Minimum white space [1/10 mm]


Minimum space between the black border and page contents.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 95


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 11 Configuring processing

This parameter is used to make border detection less sensitive to white dots
within the borders. White areas that are narrower than the specified value
are interpreted as part of the black border.

Assume straight borders


Select this check box if the black border's boundary is a straight line, as is
true in most cases. If you clear the check box, processing will be a bit slower
and the black border may have an arbitrary shape.

11.1.4 Configuring blank page detection


You can remove blank pages inserted as separators.

Note: Set Blank Page Detection in the flow preceding Blank Page Removal.

To configure blank page detection:

1. Go to the profile you want to configure. For more information, see “To
configure processing:“ on page 85.

2. Add Blank Page Detection to the flow list, and then click Configure.

3. Define the settings, and then click OK.

Restrict area for detection


Specifies the area to be checked for detection. You must configure the area
set before you can select it here. For more information, see “Defining areas
for recognition“ on page 193.

Tolerance
Specifies when the page is recognized as blank. The higher the value you
choose, the less spots the page may contain.

11.1.5 Configuring content extractor (color)


The Content Extractor serves as an “intelligent” conversion of images from color to
black and white, while saving as much image information as possible.

If you are unsure whether all pages you want to scan are in color, include
Conversion to xxx colors option in the flow. Conversion to xxx Colors must precede
Content Extractor.

To configure content extractor (color):

1. Go to the profile you want to configure. For more information, see “To
configure processing:“ on page 85.

2. Add Content Extractor (Color) to the flow list, and then click Configure.

3. Define the settings, and then click OK.

96 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
11.1. Configuring page processing

Channel
When the image is in true colors, pixels possess three values that identify
the intensity of red, green, and blue color values. The algorithm takes only
one of these colors or channels into account.
When you select Luminosity, a calculated value from all of these colors will
be used in the algorithm, according to the level of human sensitivity to
these colors. Each pixel in the image is assigned a value that is taken from
the channel intensity, and the threshold is calculated. All pixels with a value
higher than this threshold result will be white.

Text color

Autodetect
Determines the color automatically.

Dark
Determines the color as dark.

Light
Determines the color as light.

Threshold

Global
One threshold is calculated for the whole image.

Adaptive
The image is split into squares, each with a specific threshold.

Global sampling
Determines how many pixels are taken into account. It overlays the
image with a system of grids. Global sampling determines the space
between the grids.
The higher the grids, the lower the resulting quality, but the faster the
performance.

Adaptive grids
Determines the size of these squares in pixels.
To suppress differences, the thresholds over pixels near borders are
continuous. In other words, there are no jumps between pixels in
adjacent squares.

Secondary pass
Additional function for the improvement of the image, in case some
problem areas appear after conversion. These areas are then reevaluated in
the second cycle.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 97


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 11 Configuring processing

11.1.6 Configuring content extractor with preview (manual


processing only)

Note: This function is intended to be used manually for postprocessing


corrections on scanned pages. Therefore, it cannot be set in the process flow.

You can set the threshold values for a manual conversion of images from color to
black and white. You then see the results of recent settings in a preview.

To configure content extractor with preview:

1. Click Page > Image Filter > Content Extractor with Preview.
The histogram shows the number of pixels for all intensities (0 to 255) for the
chosen channel. The representation of the number of pixels, which are vertical
lines in the histogram, is adjusted to fit this rectangle.

2. Define the settings, and then click OK.

Channel
When the image is in true colors, all pixels possess three values that identify
the intensity of red, green, and blue color values.
The algorithm takes only one of these colors or channels into account.
When you choose Luminosity, a calculated value from all of these colors
will be used in the algorithm, according to the level of human sensitivity to
these colors.
A value is assigned to each pixel in the image, taken from the channel
intensity, and the threshold is calculated. Pixels with values higher than this
threshold result will be white.

98 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
11.1. Configuring page processing

Threshold
The threshold is the value that determines how the image will be converted.
All pixels with an intensity smaller than this threshold value are converted
to black, and all others to white.
You can set only one threshold at a time, according to the channel selected.
Conversion can be performed for one channel only. The default value is 100
for all channels.

Preview
A simplified preview of the image shows the potential result of the
conversion to black and white.

11.1.7 Configuring color conversion


You can change the color depth of pages using the following settings:

• Conversion to 16 Million Colors


• Conversion to 2 Colors
If you select this method, you must define the dithering method for the
conversion. The same dithering method is used to reduce color depth.
• Conversion to 256 Colors
If you select this method, you must define the dithering method for the
conversion. The same dithering method is used to reduce color depth.
• Conversion to Grayscale

You can either configure color conversion in the Processing subprofile or configure
it manually through the Page menu.

To configure color conversion:

1. Go to the profile you want to configure. For more information, see “To
configure processing:“ on page 85.

2. Add Conversion to xxx Colors to the flow list, and then click Configure.
You can only configure Conversion to 2 Colors and Conversion to 256 Colors.

3. Define the settings, and then click OK.

Dithering method
The best dithering method depends on the type of graphic, available colors
and whether the graphic is to be displayed or printed. Floyd-Steinberg is
always set as the default. For most graphics, this method produces a
satisfactory result. You need to test the various methods to determine which
best meets your requirements. For more information on dithering methods,
see “Using color reduction methods“ on page 271.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 99


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 11 Configuring processing

11.1.8 Configuring conversion to gray scale


You can use the Conversion to Gray Scale filter to turn color pages into scaled
grays. This saves archive space and improves the legibility of converted pages.

To configure conversion to gray scale:

1. Go to the profile you want to configure. For more information, see “To
configure processing:“ on page 85.

2. Add Conversion to Gray Scale to the flow list, and then click OK.
There are no configuration parameters for this function.

11.1.9 Configuring the crop filter


The Crop Filter function detects the image size, removes the black or white border,
and saves the reduced image.

To configure the crop filter:

1. Go to the profile you want to configure. For more information, see “To
configure processing:“ on page 85.

2. Add Crop Filter to the flow list, and then click Configure.

3. Define the settings, and then click OK.

Mode
Specifies whether the background of the documents is white or black.
Alternatively, you can select Detect background color so that the color will
be recognized automatically. This is slightly slower and sometimes may
produce unwanted results. The background color is important because only
borders filled with background color will be cropped.

Reserve borders
Crops only borders that exceed this size.

Ignore dots smaller than


Crops only empty borders. Specifies the size of dots that are ignored when
detecting if an area is empty.

100 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
11.1. Configuring page processing

11.1.10 Configuring DPI resampling


You can change the resolution of an image. The resolution can be set from 50 to 600
DPI.

You use DPI Resampling in cases where the pages are noisy and barcode or patch
code recognition is used. The probability of correct barcode or patch code
recognition on noised pages is higher if you select higher resolution values. The
pages are scanned in high resolution, barcodes are recognized, and then the
resolution is reduced. Pages with lower resolution need less space on Archive
Center.

To configure DPI resampling:

1. Go to the profile you want to configure. For more information, see “To
configure processing:“ on page 85.

2. Add DPI Resampling to the flow list, and then click Configure.

3. Define the Resolution for X and Y, and then select the Resampling method you
want to use.

4. Click OK.

11.1.11 Configuring deskew


Documents that are skewed, or not scanned in straight, are difficult to use and
occupy unnecessary storage space. You can eliminate this problem during the
scanning operation using the deskew option.

To configure deskew:

1. Go to the profile you want to configure. For more information, see “To
configure processing:“ on page 85.

2. Add Deskew to the flow list, and then click Configure.

3. Define the settings, and then click OK.

Algorithm Precision
Specifies sampling frequency. The higher this parameter, the better the
results of deskewing will be. However, setting a high value will lengthen
the run time.

Maximum Angle [deg]


Specifies the maximum angle that the scanner should consider as skewed.
Any angle greater than this value is not considered to be skewed and is
therefore ignored.

Background color
Defines the background color. This color is used as a filling color to areas
that are new after deskewing is performed.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 101


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 11 Configuring processing

The following examples illustrate how to use the maximum angle and algorithm
precision settings.

Example A: Maximum angle


This setting is useful if you are sure that the scanner never draws in pages
obliquely at more than a specific angle. For example, this means, that graphics
that are supposed to lie obliquely are not accidentally deskewed during
scanning.
In the left-hand figure, the angle was set to 5°, whereas on the right-hand side it
was set to 45°. Since the text is skewed by more than 5° and this value is greater
than the filter setting, the page is considered to be correct, and is not rotated.

Example B: Algorithm precision


The higher the sampling value, the more precise the result.
In this example, the original graphic is very complex and detailed. The higher
the selected value, the better the result.
However, precision is achieved at the expense of speed - the higher the value
you set, the slower scanning becomes.

102 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
11.1. Configuring page processing

11.1.12 Configuring despeckle (B&W)


Gray paper and traces of dirt can result in individual black dots during scanning
and can impair the quality of scanned images. You can eliminate these dots during
the scanning operation, thereby improving the legibility of the document and
reducing the file size. To do this, use Despeckle for black and white pages and
Smooth for color pages. For more information, see “Configuring smooth (color)”
on page 107.

To configure despeckle:

1. Go to the profile you want to configure. For more information, see “To
configure processing:“ on page 85.

2. Add Despeckle (B&W) to the flow list, and then click Configure.

3. Define the settings, and then click OK.

Type
Specifies the type of speckles to be removed.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 103


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 11 Configuring processing

You can remove black speckles from a white background or white speckles
from a black background.

Maximum speckle size


Specifies the maximum size of the speckles to be removed.

11.1.13 Configuring landscape to portrait


You can rotate odd pages left and even pages right.

To configure landscape to portrait:

1. Go to the profile you want to configure. For more information, see “To
configure processing:“ on page 85.

2. Add Landscape to Portrait to the flow list, and then click OK.
There are no configuration parameters.

11.1.14 Configuring OCR (Optical Character Recognition)


Note: OCR is only supported if the deprecated OCR feature is installed
separately.

Optical character recognition (OCR) automatically detects text in a picture file


during scanning. The activation of the OCR results requires scripting.

To configure OCR:

1. Go to the profile you want to configure. For more information, see “To
configure processing:“ on page 85.

2. Add OCR to the flow list, and then click Configure.

3. Define the settings, and then click OK.

Area for recognition


Specifies the area to be checked for recognition. You must configure the area
settings before you can select it here. For more information, see “Defining
areas for recognition“ on page 193.

Language
Select the language to be recognized. The following languages are
supported:

• English
• German
• French
• Spanish
• Italian

104 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
11.1. Configuring page processing

In the processing script, the OCR result can be accessed with


PageAttributes.GetOcrText();. For more information, see “Scripting
extension” on page 120.

Restrict area for recognition


Specifies the area to be checked for recognition. You must configure the area
setting before you can select it here. For more information, see “Defining
areas for recognition“ on page 193.

Recognition tab
You can change the settings to enhance recognition of the individual patch
codes.
For a description of the settings, see the Recognition tab of the Barcode
recognition. For more information, see Recognition tab on page 94.

11.1.15 Configuring patch code recognition


You can separate or classify documents by Patch Code.

Note: Set Patch Code Recognition in the flow preceding Document separation
or Classification.

To configure patch code recognition:

1. Go to the profile you want to configure. For more information, see “To
configure processing:“ on page 85.

2. Add Patch Code Recognition to the flow list, and then click Configure.

3. Define the settings, and then click OK.


Patch Code tab

Patch Codes
Names of each patch code.
The highlighted code is shown in the Preview area.

Orientation
Specifies whether the code is to be read vertically or horizontally.

Restrict area for recognition


Specifies the area to be checked for recognition. You must configure the area
setting before you can select it here. For more information, see “Defining
areas for recognition“ on page 193.

Recognition tab
You can change the settings to enhance recognition of the individual patch
codes.
For a description of the settings, see the Recognition tab of the Barcode
recognition. For more information, see Recognition tab on page 94.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 105


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 11 Configuring processing

11.1.16 Configuring quality indicator


The quality indicator detects images that do not meet the specified quality
requirements. The indicator automatically applies the Bad Quality Marker to those
images. Images that do not meet the quality requirements should not be archived.
This operation is only supported by OpenText Capture Center.

To configure the quality indicator:

1. Go to the profile you want to configure. For more information, see “To
configure processing:“ on page 85.

2. Add Quality Indicator to the flow list, and then click Configure.

3. Select the appropriate quality indicator, and then click OK:

Contrast
The contrast checker verifies the density of color images.

Sensitivity
Specifies the contrast density of images. The lower you set the checker,
the lower contrast density will be accepted as correct in the scanned
image.

Algorithm Precision
Specifies the sampling frequency. The higher this parameter, the better
your contrast checking results will be. However, setting a high value
will lengthen run time.

Content Overflow
The content overflow checker verifies that no part of the page content, such
as text, appears outside the borders of the scanned image.

Ignore Objects
Specifies the maximum length and width of an object. Any parts of the
object that fall outside these parameters are cropped.

Character Compactness
The character compactness checker verifies that characters in the image are
not divided into too many parts, for example, very light copies.

Sensitivity
Specifies the acceptable division of characters in the image. The lower
you set the checker, the smaller distance between characters will be
accepted as correct in the scanned image.

Characters Height
Specifies the maximum, minimum and standard height of the
characters. The minimum value is 0, and the maximum value is 0.79
inches (20 mm).

106 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
11.1. Configuring page processing

Black or White Speckles


The black or white speckles checker verifies the image for black or white
speckles. Both checkers are configured in the same way.
Sensitivity
Specifies how speckled an image can be. The lower you set the checker,
the more speckles will be accepted.
Maximal Speckles Size
Specifies the maximum height and width of allowed speckles.

11.1.17 Configuring rotation


You can automatically rotate pages to the correct orientation for scanning.

To configure rotation:

1. Go to the profile you want to configure. For more information, see “To
configure processing:“ on page 85.
2. Add Rotation to the flow list, and then click Configure.
3. Select the appropriate rotation, and then click OK:

Left
The page is rotated 90 degrees to the left.
Right
The page is rotated 90 degrees to the right.
180°
The page is rotated 180 degrees.

11.1.18 Configuring smooth (color)


Gray paper and traces of dirt result in individual black dots or noise during
scanning, and can impair the quality of scanned images. You can eliminate these
dots during the scanning operation, thereby improving the legibility of the
document and reducing the file size. To do so, use Despeckle for monochrome
pages and Smooth for color pages.

To configure smooth for color pages:

1. Go to the profile you want to configure. For more information, see “To
configure processing:“ on page 85.
2. Add Smooth (Color) to the flow list, and then click Configure.
3. Define the settings, and then click OK.

Method
Specifies the cleaning method. All methods reduce the noise (dirty pixels) of
the image and improve the quality.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 107


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 11 Configuring processing

• Min - Max
The Min-Max filter is a weaker variant of the Median filter. It does not
lose as much relevant data, but is able to remove some kinds of noise.
For this method, the size option is disabled.
• Median
The Median filter takes an array of 3x3 pixels into account. It sorts the
pixels by color and determines the pixel in the middle. The color value
of this pixel is then assigned to all pixels in the array. If the dirty area is
large, this filter may be unable to remove the noise.
For this method, the size option is disabled.
• Average
The Average filter computes the value of a pixel as an average of the
pixels in the surrounding area. The size of the considered area is
configured under Size.

Size
Specifies the area size for the Average method.

11.1.19 Configuring software imprinter


Enterprise Scan imprints information on your scanned documents during scanning,
similar to the endorser functionality. It works with all scanners or images that you
import into Enterprise Scan. You can imprint, for example, a unique number
sequence and imprint it in a location of choice.

To configure Software Imprinter settings:

1. Go to the profile you want to configure. For more information, see “To
configure processing:“ on page 85.
2. Add Software Imprinter to the flow list, and then click Configure.
3. Define the settings, and then click OK.
Settings tab

Template String
Defines the printed appearance of the imprint.
The imprint string may consist of:

• Static text, for example “test”.

Note: If the text is too long it will be trimmed.

• Format specifier that requires a one-time expansion by Enterprise Scan,


for example %u.
• Format specifier that requires a dynamic expansion by Enterprise Scan
for every single page, for example %t or %n.

108 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
11.1. Configuring page processing

Supported format specifier:

%c

• Type: Static
• Interpretation: Computer Name

%d

• Type: Static
• Interpretation: The current date.

%n

• Type: Dynamic
• Interpretation: Counter of pages.

%t

• Type: Dynamic
• Interpretation: The current time.

%u

• Type: Static
• Interpretation: The current user name.

Example 11-1: Imprinter string


Using %t %u %n means:

• Enterprise Scan will expand %u and pass %t robert %n to the


scanner.
• The scanner will expand %t and %n and prints 20150523 robert
0100, 20120523 robert 0101 and so on, on the scanned pages.

Automatic Counter

Current Value
Starts with the number of the page you enter and increases by 1 after
every page that is scanned.

Digits
Number of digits the string consists. For example, if you select Counter
Value and enter 4 it prints 0001, 0002 and so on. That is, empty
positions in the string will be filled with 0.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 109


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 11 Configuring processing

Counter Persistency
Scan
Sets the counter back to 0 every time you press Scan.

Session
Sets the counter back to 0 when you restart Enterprise Scan or switch to
another profile.

Global
Sets the counter never back to 0.

Position tab

Position
Specifies the position of the imprint on the page.

Offset from Border


Adds a border before imprinting.

Alignment
Specifies the orientation of the page.

11.2 Separating documents (document creation)


If you do not define separation criteria, all pages will be scanned into one document.
After scanning, you must split this document manually into several documents. To
avoid this manual work, you can define separator pages specifying the end of one
document and the beginning of a new one.

You can select following methods of document separation:


• Separation by 2D barcode
• Separation by barcode
• Separation by blank page
• Separation by Filename
• Separation by Nth Page
• Separation by Patch Code

110 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
11.2. Separating documents (document creation)

11.2.1 Configuring separation by 2D barcode


You can specify how individual documents will be recognized and separated by
means of a 2D barcode during scanning.

Note: Set 2D Barcode recognition in the flow preceding Separation by 2D


Barcode.

To configure separation by 2D barcode:

1. Go to the profile you want to configure. For more information, see “To
configure processing:“ on page 85.

2. Add Separation by 2D Barcode to the flow list, and then click Configure.

3. Define the settings, and then click OK.

Conditions

Barcode type
Separates the document only if the identified 2D barcode matches the
selected one.

Note: You can select one 2D barcode or all 2D barcodes. If you


want only a few barcodes to be used as separators, add Separate
by barcode to the processing flow as often as needed.

Checksum is OK
Separates the document only if the checksum is analyzed as correct.

Barcode text matches regular expression


Separates the document only if the string you entered in the field (see
“Configuring barcode recognition” on page 91) and the detected string
matches. For examples of possible entries, see “Working with regular
expressions“ on page 273.

Options
For separation, you can use leading pages containing only the barcode. You
can delete these pages automatically during scanning, mark them for
manual deletion, or keep them.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 111


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 11 Configuring processing

11.2.2 Configuring separation by barcode


You can specify by means of a barcode how individual documents will be
recognized and separated during scanning.

Note: Set Barcode recognition in the flow preceding Separation by Barcode.

The Separate by Filename function will also set the index of the document to the
barcode.

To configure separation by barcode:

1. Go to the profile you want to configure. For more information, see “To
configure processing:“ on page 85.

2. Add Separation by Barcode to the flow list, and then click Configure.

3. Define the settings, and then click OK.

Conditions

Barcode type
Separates the document only if the identified barcode matches the
selected one.

Note: You can select one barcode or all barcodes. If you want only
a few barcodes to be used as separators, add Separate by barcode
to the processing flow as often as needed.

Correctly and not correctly recognized


Separates the document only if the barcode is identified, but may not
correctly recognized.

Correctly recognized only


Separates the document only if the barcode is correctly recognized.

Checksum is OK
Separates the document only if the checksum is analyzed as correct.

Barcode text matches regular expression


Separates the document only if the string you entered in the field
(see “Configuring barcode recognition” on page 91) and the
detected string matches. For examples of possible entries, see
“Working with regular expressions“ on page 273.

Options
For separation, you can use leading pages containing only the barcode. You
can delete these pages automatically during scanning, mark them for
manual deletion, or keep them.

112 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
11.2. Separating documents (document creation)

11.2.3 Configuring separation by blank page


You can insert blank pages as separator pages between individual documents so that
they can be automatically separated during scanning.

Note: Set Blank Page Detection in the flow preceding Separate by Blank Page.

To configure separation by blank page:

1. Go to the profile you want to configure. For more information, see “To
configure processing:“ on page 85.

2. Add Separation by Blank Page to the flow list, and then click Configure.

3. Define the settings, and then click OK.

• Select the Accept any color check box, or


• enter the Paper color used for the blank pages.

11.2.4 Configuring separation by filename


You can use this option when importing documents using FaxLink.

When certain third-party fax software packages are used to receive faxes, they may
save faxes with multiple pages in such a way that each fax page is imported into
Enterprise Scan as a separate one-page document. In such cases, the Separate by
Filename function creates one document for each fax file and separates the imported
fax pages into the relevant documents with multiple pages.

Set Separate by Filename in the flow and no further configuration is then needed.

Separate by Filename function will also set the index of the document to the file
name.

To configure separation by filename:

1. Go to the profile you want to configure. For more information, see “To
configure processing:“ on page 85.

2. Add Separation by Filename to the flow list. No further configuration is


needed.

3. Click OK.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 113


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 11 Configuring processing

11.2.5 Configuring separation by nth page


If all documents have the same number of pages, you can define every nth page as a
separator page.

The Separate by Nth Page function will set the index of the document to the file
name. However, this is only for the first document and not for the subsequent
documents.

To configure separation by nth page:

1. Go to the profile you want to configure. For more information, see “To
configure processing:“ on page 85.

2. Add Separation by Nth Page to the flow list, and then click Configure.

3. Enter the page after which a new document is to be created, and then click OK.

11.2.6 Configuring separation by patch code


You can specify that, during scanning, the individual documents will be recognized
and separated by means of a patch code.

Note: Set Patch Code recognition in the flow preceding Separate by Patch
Code.

To configure separation by patch code:

1. Go to the profile you want to configure. For more information, see “To
configure processing:“ on page 85.

2. Add Separation by Patch Code to the flow list, and then click Configure.

3. In the Patch code type list, click the patch code, optionally select the Option,
and then click OK.

Note: Select the Delete page with recognized patch code check box if the
separation pages only contain the patch code, and if these pages should be
automatically deleted.

114 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
11.3. Configuring batch and folder creation or assignment

11.3 Configuring batch and folder creation or


assignment
You can use batches and folders to build a hierarchical structure of your documents,
with batches as the highest level, and folders residing beneath batches. For an
overview, see “Changing the document group, batch, or folder” on page 38.

The configuration is identical for batches and folders, so the following sections apply
to batches and folders.

There are two ways to assign documents to batches and folders:


• During scanning, pages are assigned to existing or newly created batches and
folders according to the rules set in the profile configuration. The assignment
must always be connected with a proper separation of documents.
• After scanning, pages can be assigned according to the rules set in the Document
menu and the Move to Batch or Move to Folder menu item.

You can select following methods of batch and folder creation or assignment:
• 2D barcode
• barcode
• patch code

Alternatively, the user can directly select a batch or a folder to scan documents into,
before scanning is started. To configure this scenario, add Batch/folder creation or
assignment by user to the operation flow in the Processing subprofile.

11.3.1 Configuring batch and folder creation or assignment by


2D barcode
You can assign documents to batches and folders by means of 2D barcodes. The
configuration of 2D barcode parameters for batch and folder creation or assignment
is identical with the configuration of simple barcodes.

Note: To use this function, make sure 2D Barcode Recognition is set in the
flow preceding Batch Creation or Assignment by 2D Barcode/Folder Creation
or Assignment by 2D Barcode.

To configure batch and folder creation or assignment by 2D barcode:

1. Go to the profile you want to configure. For more information, see “To
configure processing:“ on page 85.

2. Add Batch/folder Creation or Assignment by 2D Barcode to the flow list, and


then click Configure.

3. Define the settings, and then click OK.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 115


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 11 Configuring processing

Add an assignment rule


Click Add to add a new line at the end of the list.
By default, the first batch and folder name appears in the Batch/Folder
column, and the first 2D barcode from the 2D barcodes list appears in the
Recognize barcodes column.
Checksum and Regular expression are not checked by default.

Batch/Folder
You have the following options:

• Select a batch or folder name from the list.


• Enter a name for the new batch or folder to be created during
scanning.
• Select [NewBatch]/[NewFolder] from the list. A new batch or folder,
with a name containing timestamp, will be created automatically
during the scan process whenever the conditions are met. This
means that several batches or folders might be created during one
scanning session.

Recognize barcodes
Select the 2D barcode that should be recognized, or select All, if you
want all 2D barcodes to be recognized. Each document with the selected
2D barcode(s) will be assigned to the batch or folder selected in this line.

Checksum
Assigns the document into the selected batch or folder only if the
checksum is valid.

Regular expression
Uses a regular expression for the assignment. The regular expression
must be consistent with the UNIX standard. For more information, see
“Working with regular expressions“ on page 273.

Remove
Deletes the selected line.

Move Up/Move Down


Changes the sequence in which the barcodes are checked during scanning.

116 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
11.3. Configuring batch and folder creation or assignment

11.3.2 Configuring batch and folder creation or assignment by


barcode
You can assign documents to batches and folders by means of barcodes. The
configuration of barcode parameters is similar to the one outlined in the Barcode
Recognition section. For more information, see Recognition tab on page 94.

Set Barcode Recognition in the flow preceding Batch Creation or Assignment by


Barcode/Folder Creation or Assignment by Barcode.

Tip: For an example, see “Separating documents by barcode and sorting into
groups using regular expressions“ on page 263.

To configure batch and folder creation or assignment by barcode:

1. Go to the profile you want to configure. For more information, see “To
configure processing:“ on page 85.
2. Add Batch/folder Creation or Assignment by Barcode to the flow list, and then
click Configure.
3. Define the settings, and then click OK.

Add an assignment rule


Click Add to add a new line at the end of the list.
By default, the first batch or folder name appears in the Batch/Folder
column, and the first 2D barcode from the 2D barcodes list appears in the
Recognize barcodes column.
Checksum and Regular expression are not checked by default.
Batch/Folder
You have the following options:

• Select a batch or folder name from the list.


• Enter a name for a new batch or folder to be created during
scanning.
• Select [NewBatch]/[NewFolder] from the list. A new batch or folder
with a name containing timestamp will be created automatically
during the scan process whenever the conditions are met. This
means that several batches or folders might be created during one
scanning session.

Recognize barcodes
Select the 2D barcode that should be recognized, or select All if you
want all 2D barcodes to be recognized. Each document with the selected
2D barcode(s) will be assigned to the batch or folder selected in this line.
Checksum
Assigns the document to the selected batch or folder only if the
checksum is valid.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 117


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 11 Configuring processing

Regular expression
Uses a regular expression for the assignment. The regular expression
must be consistent with the UNIX standard. For more information, see
“Working with regular expressions“ on page 273.

Remove
Deletes the selected line.

Move Up/Move Down


Changes the sequence in which the barcodes are checked during scanning.

11.3.3 Configuring batch or folder creation or assignment by


patch code
You can assign documents to batches or folders by means of patch codes. The
configuration of patch code parameters for batch or folder creation or assignment is
identical to the configuration of classifications into groups by patch code.

Set Patch Code Recognition in the flow preceding Batch Creation or Assignment by
Patch Code/Folder Creation or Assignment by Patch Code.

To configure batch/folder creation or assignment by patch code:

1. Go to the profile you want to configure. For more information, see “To
configure processing:“ on page 85.

2. Add Batch/folder Creation or Assignment by Patch Code to the flow list, and
then click Configure.

3. Define the settings, and then click OK.

Add an assignment rule


Click Add to add a new line at the end of the list.
By default, the first batch or folder name appears in the Batch/Folder
column, and the first 2D barcode from the 2D barcodes list appears in the
Recognize Patch Codes column.

Batch/Folder
You have the following options:

• Select a batch or folder name from the list.


• Enter a name for a new batch or folder to be created during
scanning.
• Select [NewBatch]/[NewFolder] from the list box. A new batch or
folder with a name containing the timestamp will be created
automatically during the scan process whenever the conditions are
met. This means that several batches or folders might be created
during one scanning session.

118 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
11.4. Configuring document processing

Recognize Patch Codes


Select the patch code that should be recognized. Each document with
the selected patch code(s) will be assigned to the batch or folder
selected in this line.

Remove
Deletes the selected line.

Move Up/Move Down


Changes the sequence in which the barcodes are checked during scanning.

11.3.4 Configuring batch or folder creation or assignment by


user
You can assign the documents directly to a batch or folder during scanning.

When you start scanning, the Select Batch or Select Folder dialog box opens. Select
a Batch or a Folder name from the list or enter a name for a new batch or a new
folder. This new batch or folder is created during scanning, and all scanned pages
are assigned to this batch or folder.

Tip: You can predefine the list of available batches and folders in the Static
Batches or Static Folders tab in Tools > Workstation Options.

Note: This creation or assignment function does not require a preceding


“Separation” or “Recognition” rule.

To configure batch or folder creation or assignment by user:

1. Go to the profile you want to configure. For more information, see “To
configure processing:“ on page 85.

2. Add Batch/folder Creation or Assignment by User to the flow list, and then
click OK. No further configuration is needed.

11.4 Configuring document processing


Document processing comprises a function for automatically removing blank pages
and a scripting extension.

You can use the following document processes:


• Removing blank pages
• Scripting extension

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 119


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 11 Configuring processing

11.4.1 Removing blank pages


You can automatically remove blank separator pages that have been inserted in the
paper stack before scanning. The function is also useful in cases of double-sided
scanning, where the reverse side of a sheet is scanned even though it is blank.

In order to use this function, Blank Page Detection must be set in the flow preceding
Remove Blank Pages.

To remove blank pages:

1. Go to the profile you want to configure. For more information, see “To
configure processing:“ on page 85.

2. Add Remove Blank Pages to the flow list, and then click Configure.

3. Define the settings, and then click OK.

• Select the Accept any color check box, or


• enter the Paper color used for the blank pages.

11.4.2 Scripting extension


You can configure document processing by scripting. For example, you can write
scripts to access the page attributes, like simple or 2D barcodes and OCR results, and
then process them. Some additional uses include the following:

• Assign documents to a batch or a folder.


• Classify documents into a group.
• Separate documents.

If you want to use 2D barcodes, simple barcodes, or OCR in your processing script,
make sure the respective plug-ins are properly configured in the page processing
flow.

To configure scripting extension:

1. Go to the profile you want to configure. For more information, see “To
configure processing:“ on page 85.

2. Add Scripting Extension to the flow list, and then click Configure.

3. In the Configure Processing Extension Script dialog box, enter your script for
document processing. The scripting interface in the processing script looks
similar to the following:

Page attributes

• Simple and 2D barcodes:

120 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
11.5. Configuring document classification

var bc = PageAttributes.GetBarcode(index);
var bc2d = PageAttributes.Get2DBarcode(index);
• To access the OCR result:

PageAttributes.GetOcrText();

Document properties (to be passed to the separation action)

var props = Separation.CreateDocumentProperties();


props.Group = "GROUP XYZ";
props.Batch = "BATCH XYZ";
props.Folder = "FOLDER XYZ";
props.Index = "INDEX XYZ";

Separation

// separates only
//Separation.Separate(props);
// separates and deletes the current page
//Separation.Separate(props, Separation.Flags.DeletePage);
// separates and sets the delete-marker for the current page
Separation.Separate(props,
Separation.Flags.MarkPageForDelete);

4. Click Load, Save, and Compile to open, store, and test the scripts.
Use References to add a reference to third party libraries, see “Assigning third
party libraries” on page 155.
For details about scripting, see “Working with scripts for indexing and
archiving“ on page 251.
You can click Open Global Function Depot to display the Global Function
Depot, see “Global function depot” on page 260.
5. Click OK.

11.5 Configuring document classification


Documents can be assigned to groups. This is known as Classification. Classification
divides documents into groups depending on the rules you set.

Using groups gives a better overview of scanned documents and simplifies your
work, especially when you archive into External Storage. Groups correspond with
directories in the file system, so only the desired group of documents can be selected
for further processing.

There are two ways to classify documents:


• During scanning, pages are classified according to the rules set in the profile
configuration. Classification must always be connected with a proper separation
of documents.
• After scanning, pages can be classified according to the rules set in the
Document > Classify menu item.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 121


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 11 Configuring processing

You can select following methods of document classification:


• 2D barcode
• barcode
• patch code

Alternatively, the user can directly select a batch or a folder to scan documents into,
before scanning is started. To configure this scenario, add Batch/folder creation or
assignment by user to the operation flow in the Processing subprofile.

11.5.1 Configuring classification by 2D barcode


You can classify documents to groups by means of 2D barcodes. The configuration
of 2D barcode parameters for classification is identical to the configuration of simple
barcodes.

Set 2D Barcode Recognition in the flow preceding Classification by 2D Barcode.

To configure classification by 2D barcode:

1. Go to the profile you want to configure. For more information, see “To
configure processing:“ on page 85.
2. Add Classification by 2D Barcode to the flow list, and then click Configure.
3. Define the settings, and then click OK.

Add an assignment rule


Click Add to add a new line at the end of the list.
By default, the first group name appears in the Group column, and the first
2D barcode from the 2D barcodes list appears in the Recognize barcodes
column.
Checksum and Regular expression are not checked by default.
Group
Select a group name from the list, or enter a name for a new group to be
created during scanning.
Recognize barcodes
Select the 2D barcode that should be recognized, or select All if you
want all 2D barcodes to be recognized. Each document with the selected
2D barcode(s) will be classified into the group selected in this line.
Checksum
Assigns the document into the selected batch or folder only if the
checksum is valid.
Regular expression
Uses a regular expression for the assignment. The regular expression
must be consistent with the UNIX standard. For more information, see
“Working with regular expressions“ on page 273.

122 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
11.5. Configuring document classification

Remove
Deletes the selected line.

Move Up/Move Down


Changes the sequence in which the barcodes are checked during scanning.

11.5.2 Configuring classification by barcode


You can classify documents into groups by means of barcodes. The configuration of
barcode parameters is similar to those outlined in the Barcode Recognition section.
For more information, see Recognition tab on page 94.

Set Barcode Recognition in the flow preceding Classification by Barcode.

Tip: For an example, see “Separating documents by barcode and sorting into
groups using regular expressions“ on page 263.

To configure classification by barcode:

1. Go to the profile you want to configure. For more information, see “To
configure processing:“ on page 85.

2. Add Classification by Barcode to the flow list, and then click Configure.

3. Define the settings, and then click OK.

Add an assignment rule


Click Add to add a new line at the end of the list.
By default, the first group name appears in the Group column, and the first
2D barcode from the 2D barcodes list appears in the Recognize barcodes
column.
Checksum and Regular expression are not checked by default.

Group
Select a group name from the list, or enter a name for a new group to be
created during scanning.

Recognize barcodes
Select the 2D barcode that should be recognized, or select All if you
want all 2D barcodes to be recognized. Each document with the selected
2D barcode(s) will be classified into the group selected in this line.

Checksum
Assigns the document into the selected batch or folder only if the
checksum is valid.

Regular expression
Uses a regular expression for the assignment. The regular expression
must be consistent with the UNIX standard. For more information, see
“Working with regular expressions“ on page 273.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 123


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 11 Configuring processing

Remove
Deletes the selected line.
Move Up/Move Down
Changes the sequence in which the barcodes are checked during scanning.

11.5.3 Configuring classification by patch code


You can classify documents into groups by means of a patch code. The configuration
of patch code parameters is similar to the method outlined in the Patch Code
Recognition section. For more information, see “Configuring patch code
recognition” on page 105.

Set Patch Code Recognition in the flow preceding Classification by Patch Code.

To configure classification by patch code:

1. Go to the profile you want to configure. For more information, see “To
configure processing:“ on page 85.
2. Add Classification by Patch Code to the flow list, and then click Configure.
3. Define the settings, and then click OK.

Add an assignment rule


Click Add to add a new line at the end of the list.
By default, the first group name appears in the Group column, and the first
patch code from the patch codes list appears in the Recognize Patch Code
column.
Group
Select a group name from the list, or enter a name for a new group to be
created during scanning.
Recognize Patch Codes
Select the patch code that should be recognized, or select All if you
want all patch codes to be recognized. Each document with the selected
patch code(s) will be classified into the group selected in this line.
Checksum
Assigns the document into the selected batch or folder only if the
checksum is valid.
Regular expression
Uses a regular expression for the assignment. The regular expression
must be consistent with the UNIX standard. For more information, see
“Working with regular expressions“ on page 273.
Remove
Deletes the selected line.
Move Up/Move Down
Changes the sequence in which the barcodes are checked during scanning.

124 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
11.5. Configuring document classification

11.5.4 Configuring classification by user


You can assign the documents directly to a group during scanning.

When you start scanning, the Select Group dialog box opens. Select a Group name
from the list or enter a name for a new group. This new group is created during
scanning, and all scanned pages are assigned to this group.

Tip: You can predefine the list of available groups in the Static Groups tab in
Tools > Workstation Options.

Note: This classification function does not require a preceding “Separation” or


“Recognition” rule.

To configure classification by user:

1. Go to the profile you want to configure. For more information, see “To
configure processing:“ on page 85.

2. Add Classification by User to the flow list, and then click OK. No further
configuration is needed.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 125


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 12
Configuring indexing and archiving

In the Archiving subprofile, you can define where and how the scanned and
processed pages will be stored. The Archiving subprofile must be configured
according to the processing workflow and the leading application.

To configure indexing and archiving:

1. Click Profile > Manage Profiles.

2. In the Profile Manager dialog box, select the profile you want to configure, and
then click Modify.

3. In the Configure Profile dialog box, click the Archiving tab, select the
subprofile, and then click Modify.
The Configure Archiving Subprofile dialog box is divided into the following
parts:

• Init-Profile Script: For more information, see “Configuring an Init-Profile


script” on page 131.
• Indexing: For more information, see “Configuring indexing” on page 131.
• Pre-Archive Script: For more information, see “Configuring a Pre-Archive
script” on page 158.
• Archiving: For more information, see “Configuring archiving” on page 159.

12.1 Configuring indexing and archiving scenarios


Once the pages have been scanned, checked, sorted, and combined to form
documents and groups, you can start the indexing and archiving process. In order to
define the appropriate settings in Enterprise Scan, you must know which archiving
scenario is being used:
• Storing in Content Server, see “Configuring Content Server archiving scenario”
on page 128.
• Early Archiving (SAP), and Late Archiving with barcode (SAP), see “Configuring
SAP indexing and archiving scenario” on page 128.
• Archiving (TCP), and pre-indexing (TCP), see “Configuring the TCP indexing
and archiving scenario” on page 129.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 127


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 12 Configuring indexing and archiving

12.1.1 Configuring Content Server archiving scenario


In this scenario, the documents are sent to a Content Server folder and stored on
Content Server. Optionally, a workflow can be started, based on the documents.

To archive a document on Content Server:

1. Configure the relevant Content Server objects, categories, and workflow maps
on Content Server. For more information, see OpenText Content Server Admin
Online Help - Content Server Administration (LLESWBA-H-AGD).

2. Create the archiving subprofile and configure it for Content Server. For more
information, see “Archiving documents on Content Server” on page 166.

3. Archive the document.


Enterprise Scan exports the document to Content Server and starts a workflow
if specified.

12.1.2 Configuring SAP indexing and archiving scenario


Early Archiving In the Early Archiving scenario, paper documents are scanned and attached to a
workflow as soon as the documents arrive in the office. All business tasks
concerning the documents are performed with the electronic document and use the
workflow. SAP controls the documents and routes them throughout the company.

The corresponding scenario names are Storing for subsequent entry and Storing
for subsequent assignment. The scenario names depend on the SAP product
version.

Tip: For preconditions in SAP, refer to the corresponding SAP customizing


guide.

To archive a document using Early Archiving:

1. Install OpenText Document Pipeline for SAP® Solutions.

2. If necessary, activate archiving from SAP. For more information, see


“Configuring archiving from the leading application” on page 216.

3. Scan the document.

4. Index the document.

5. Archive the document.


The document is archived, and the unique identification of the document in the
archive (document ID, archive ID) is sent to SAP. This establishes the link
between the data in SAP and the archived document.

Late Archiving In the Late Archiving with Barcode scenario, paper documents are passed through the
with Barcode office and are not archived until all document-related work has been completed. If
documents are archived in this way, indexing by barcode, patch code or another

128 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
12.1. Configuring indexing and archiving scenarios

indexing method is used to join the documents to the corresponding business entries
in SAP. Documents are identified by a barcode or patch code on their first page.

The corresponding scenario name is Late storing with barcode.

To archive a document using Late Archiving with Barcode:

1. Install OpenText Document Pipeline for SAP® Solutions.


2. In OpenText Administration Client, create an archive mode with the
Late_Archiving scenario. For more information, see section 11 “Configuring
scan stations” in OpenText Archive Center - Administration Guide (AR-ACN).
3. Configure the OpenText Document Pipeline for SAP® Solutions with the
archive mode defined in OpenText Administration Client. For more
information, see “Configuring Server and Document Pipeline settings”
on page 209.
4. Scan the document.
5. Index the document.
6. Archive the document.
The document is archived, and the unique identification of the document in the
archive (document ID, archive ID), along with the barcode or patch code, is sent
to SAP. The link between the entry in SAP and the archived document is
established by the matching of barcodes or patch codes. These steps take place
in the OpenText Document Pipeline for SAP Solutions.

12.1.3 Configuring the TCP indexing and archiving scenario


Archiving (Late With the Archiving (Late Indexing) scenario, you can store a scanned document in
Indexing) Archive Center. After archiving, the document appears as an attachment of a work
item in the indexing work queue of TCP.

To archive a document using Late Indexing:

1. In OpenText Administration Client, create an archive mode with the following


preconditions and assign the mode to the scan station:

• DMS_Indexing scenario. For more information, see section 11 “Configuring


scan stations” in OpenText Archive Center - Administration Guide (AR-ACN).
• In the archive mode, set the following Extended Conditions:
PS_ENCODING_BASE64_UTF8N. For more information, see section 18
“Working with TCP Document Pipelines” in OpenText Transactional Content
Processing and OpenText Enterprise Process Services - Administration Guide
(TCP-AGD).
2. Install OpenText TCP Document Pipelines.
3. Configure the OpenText TCP Document Pipelines with the archive mode
defined in OpenText Administration Client, and then select DMS doctype. For

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 129


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 12 Configuring indexing and archiving

more information, see “Configuring Server and Document Pipeline settings”


on page 209.

4. Scan the document.

5. Index the document.

6. Archive the document.


Depending on how OpenText TCP Document Pipelines has been configured,
you may be able to perform additional steps, such as sending a notification or
starting a process.

Pre-Indexing With the Pre-Indexing scenario, you can store additional document properties with
the scanned document in Archive Center. A, for example TCP user, can use these
properties to retrieve the document.

To archive a document using Pre-Indexing:

1. In OpenText Administration Client, create an archive mode with the following


preconditions and assign the mode to the scan station:

• DMS_Indexing scenario. For more information, see section 11 “Configuring


scan stations” in OpenText Archive Center - Administration Guide (AR-ACN).
• In the archive mode, set the following Extended Conditions:
PS_ENCODING_BASE64_UTF8N. For more information, see section 18
“Working with TCP Document Pipelines” in OpenText Transactional Content
Processing and OpenText Enterprise Process Services - Administration Guide
(TCP-AGD).

2. Install OpenText TCP Document Pipelines.

3. Configure the OpenText TCP Document Pipelines with the archive mode
defined in OpenText Administration Client, and then select DMS doctype. For
more information, see “Configuring Server and Document Pipeline settings”
on page 209.

4. Define the pre-indexing form in the Archiving subprofile. For more


information, see “Configuring indexing” on page 131.

5. Configure the Transactional Content Processing Sign In. For more


information, see “Defining the sign in to TCP” on page 211.

6. Scan the document.

7. Index the document.

8. Archive the document.


Depending on how OpenText TCP Document Pipelines has been configured,
you may be able to perform additional steps, such as sending a notification or
starting a process.

130 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
12.2. Configuring an Init-Profile script

12.2 Configuring an Init-Profile script


In the archiving subprofile, you can write an Init-Profile script that is called
whenever the user activates an archiving subprofile.

The following actions activate an archiving subprofile:


• Starting Enterprise Scan.
• Switching between main profiles.
• Switching between the archiving subprofiles within a main profile.

To configure an Init-Profile script:

1. Go to the profile you want to configure. For more information, see “To
configure indexing and archiving:“ on page 127.

Tip: Alternatively, if you want to configure the current profile, click


Profile > Configure Archiving.

2. In the Configure Archiving Subprofile dialog box, click the Init-Profile Script
tab, and then click Edit.

3. In the Configure Init-Profile Script dialog box, enter the script in the Script
field, and then click OK.

• Use Load, Save, and Compile to open, store, and test the script.
• Use References to add a reference to third party libraries. For more
information, see “Assigning third party libraries” on page 155.
• Use Open Global Function Depot to open the Global Function Depot,
where you can collect all your Enterprise Scan scripts. For more information,
see “Global function depot” on page 260.

You can find scripting example in the Scripting Examples > Init-Profile Script Examples
section in the Indexing and Scripting Guide in OpenText Developer Network (OTDN)
(https://knowledge.opentext.com/go/EnterpriseScan_OTDN).

12.3 Configuring indexing


The indexing masks are linked to the archiving subprofiles. Each archiving
subprofile has just one indexing mask.

To configure indexing:

1. Go to the profile you want to configure. For more information, see “To
configure indexing and archiving:“ on page 127.

Tip: Alternatively, if you want to configure the current profile, click


Profile > Configure Archiving.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 131


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 12 Configuring indexing and archiving

2. In the Configure Archiving Subprofile dialog box, click the Indexing tab.
In this dialog box you define the indexing fields for the archiving profile shown
in the heading.

3. Specify how to define the indexing fields.

• Click Add > New field to define own index fields. For more information, see
“Configuring custom index fields” on page 133.

• Click Add > Import from TCP to import the records from TCP Business
Object Layer. For more information, see “Importing records from TCP”
on page 134. The records must be defined in the OpenText TCP Modeler.

• Click Add > Import from Content Server to import the attributes from
Content Server. For more information, see “Importing Content Server
attributes” on page 137. The attributes must be defined in the Content
Server administration.

• Click Add > Import from Oracle to import the attributes from Oracle Web
Service. For more information, see “Importing Oracle Web Service
attributes” on page 144.

• Click Add > Import from SAP to import the attributes from SAP. For more
information, see “Configuring indexing for SAP” on page 148.

4. Click References to add a reference to third party libraries. This is only


necessary if you are using advanced scripting possibilities. For more
information, see “Assigning third party libraries” on page 155 and “Working
with scripts for indexing and archiving“ on page 251.

5. Click Field areas to define the area in the document where the scan operator
will find the required information for editing the selected indexing field. For
more information, see “Assigning zooming areas to indexing fields”
on page 157.

Tip: You can define the order of the index field with the arrow buttons.

6. If you have imported the index fields from Content Server, you can group the
fields in the indexing form according to the set names. To do this, select the
Group fields by sets check box. The set name is first part of the field name
separated by colons.

Note: If you have imported the index fields from TCP Business Object
Layer, you must clear this option.

7. Click OK.
The Indexing view opens with the specified index fields when the scan operator
selects this profile. For more information, see “Indexing and archiving
documents“ on page 47.

132 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
12.3. Configuring indexing

12.3.1 Configuring custom index fields


You can influence the behavior of the indexing input fields by writing scripts where
you can define the initial values and dependencies in the input fields. You can
export and import these scripts as well. For details about scripting, see “Working
with scripts for indexing and archiving“ on page 251.

To configure custom index fields:

1. Go to the profile you want to configure. For more information, see “To
configure indexing and archiving:“ on page 127.

Tip: Alternatively, if you want to configure the current profile, click


Profile > Configure Archiving.
2. In the Configure Archiving Subprofile dialog box, click the Indexing tab.
3. Click Add > New field or Edit if you have selected an existing indexing field.
4. In the Configure Field dialog box, define the settings.

Name
Name of the field.
Type
Select the field type.
Content Server
Only active if User type is selected. For more information, see “Indexing the
Content Server User attribute type” on page 144.
Display String
Name that is displayed in the index form.
Mandatory
Select this check box if the scan operator must complete this field.
Owner
Select Document or Global.
Document
The values in indexing fields with the Document owner are valid for
the particular document. They are persistent, which means they do not
change even if a different document is selected in the stack or if
Enterprise Scan is shut down.
Global
The values in indexing fields with the Global owner are valid for all
documents. They are persistent when archiving but they are lost if the
profile or subprofile are changed, or if Enterprise Scan is shut down.
Indexing fields of the Global type are highlighted in light blue in the
Indexing view and in the Indexing tab of the Configure Archiving
Subprofile dialog box.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 133


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 12 Configuring indexing and archiving

Count, Maximum, Locked


Number of rows for the indexing field, and are only relevant for indexing
with multiple values. For more information, see “Indexing TCP attributes
with multiple values” on page 135 and “Indexing attributes with multiple
rows from Content Server” on page 141.

More
Only activ for importing TCP relations. For more information, see
“Configuring TCP relations” on page 135.

5. Assign scripts to the index field. You can click tabs with the following scripts:

• Initialization script
• Selection script
• Validation script
• Update script

For more information, see “Scripts in the interactive phase” on page 251.

6. Click Load, Save, and Compile to open, store, and test the scripts.
You can click Open Global Function Depot to display the Global Function
Depot. For more information, see “Global function depot” on page 260.

7. Click OK.

12.3.2 Importing records from TCP


You can import records from TCP Business Object Layer. When the scan operator
completes the index fields and archives the document, the records' attributes are
automatically passed to TCP Business Object Layer.

Note: Prior to importing, the records must have been defined in OpenText TCP
Modeler.

To import record types from TCP Business Object Layer:

1. Go to the profile you want to configure. For more information, see “To
configure indexing and archiving:“ on page 127.

Tip: Alternatively, if you want to configure the current profile, click


Profile > Configure Archiving.

2. In the Configure Archiving Subprofile dialog box, click the Indexing tab, and
then click Add > Import from TCP.

3. Sign in to TCP (for more information, see “Defining the sign in to TCP”
on page 211) to display the Import Record Types dialog box.

4. Select one document type.

134 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
12.3. Configuring indexing

Note: Only one document type can be specified, whereas any number of
data object types can be imported. The document type will contain the
scanned document itself.

5. Select one or more data object types.

6. Click Import.

12.3.2.1 Indexing TCP attributes with multiple values

To index TCP attributes with multiple values:

1. Import records from TCP. For more information, see “Importing records from
TCP” on page 134.

2. Go to the profile you want to configure. For more information, see “To
configure indexing and archiving:“ on page 127.

Tip: Alternatively, if you want to configure the current profile, click


Profile > Configure Archiving.

3. In the Configure Archiving Subprofile dialog box, click the Indexing tab.

4. Mark the indexing field you want to change, and then click Edit.

5. In the Configure Field dialog box, select the number of rows in the Count field
that are displayed initially in the Indexing view. The default value is 1.

6. For fields with multiple values imported from TCP, there is no upper limit for
the number of rows. If needed, configure the limit with the Maximum check
box.

7. Select Locked if you are using a single-value property, and you want to make
sure that the number of lines cannot be changed in the Indexing view.

8. In the Indexing view, add and remove rows for indexing attributes with
multiple values by clicking the plus icon and the minus icon .

12.3.2.2 Configuring TCP relations


To learn about the use of relations in TCP scenarios, see section 31.2.12
“Relationships (also external and cross-data dictionary relationships)” in OpenText
Transactional Content Processing - Customization Guide (TCP-CGD).

Along with relations, the corresponding mapping properties are imported. This
creates duplicate entries in the list of Indexing fields in the Indexing tab of the
Configure Archiving Subprofile dialog box. The duplicates are shown in red.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 135


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 12 Configuring indexing and archiving

Notes
• Relations with compound mapping properties are not supported.
• Relations where a key of the record to be created is inserted as a foreign key
in the related record are not supported. However, they are imported because
the software cannot always identify this scenario without knowing the
semantics of the data model. You must remove these fields manually in the
Configure Archiving subprofile. To do so, mark the indexing field, and then
click Remove.

To index TCP relations:

1. Decide if the Indexing view will show the mapping properties or the relations,
and remove the unused field.
Alternatively, keep both fields so the scan operator can choose either to insert,
for example, the customer number, or select the customer from a list of
customer names.
2. Go to the profile you want to configure. For more information, see “To
configure indexing and archiving:“ on page 127.

Tip: Alternatively, if you want to configure the current profile, click


Profile > Configure Archiving.
3. In the Configure Archiving Subprofile dialog box, click the Indexing tab.
4. Mark the indexing field of an imported relation, and then click Edit.
5. In the Configure Field dialog box, click More.
6. In the Properties for Relation Account dialog box, do the following:

• Select the Displayed property type to be displayed in the Indexing view.

136 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
12.3. Configuring indexing

• Specify the Fetchlimit, which is the maximum number of lines displayed for
this property type in the Indexing view.

Note: As a default, the display property is ixos.dms:DisplayName. This


is only of use if it is maintained in the TCP application.

12.3.3 Importing Content Server attributes


You must first define the attributes in the Content Server administration before you
can import them

Notes
• Enterprise Scan supports Unicode (UTF-8) strings for indexing values when
archiving through the Document Pipeline for Content Server. As a
prerequisite, Content Server must support UTF-8.
• The relevant system attributes defined by the Content Server instance are
automatically imported as well. If they are not needed, you can delete them.
• Enterprise Scan constructs a indexing form when Copy is used in the
Content Server web interface.
• The default value for an attribute defined in Content Server can contain
quote or double quote characters. The Enterprise Scan indexing module can
process theses default values and initializes the Indexing view accordingly.

To import Content Server attributes:

1. Go to the profile you want to configure. For more information, see “To
configure indexing and archiving:“ on page 127.

Tip: Alternatively, if you want to configure the current profile, click


Profile > Configure Archiving.

2. In the Configure Archiving Subprofile dialog box, click the Indexing tab, and
then click Add > Import from Content Server.

3. Sign in to Content Server. For more information, see “Defining the sign in to
Content Server” on page 212.

4. In the Import Attributes dialog box, select the required folder, category, or
workflow, and then click Import.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 137


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 12 Configuring indexing and archiving

12.3.3.1 Importing cascading attributes


Enterprise Scan supports the import of Cascading Attributes of Content Server
Attribute Extensions module for indexing and releasing to Content Server using the
direct archiving in Content Server or the Document Pipeline for Content Server.

To import the cascading attributes from Content Server, you must first define
Cascading Attributes in the Content Server Administration.

To import Cascading Attributes from Content Server:

1. Go to the profile you want to configure. For more information, see “To
configure indexing and archiving:“ on page 127.

Tip: Alternatively, if you want to configure the current profile, click


Profile > Configure Archiving.

2. In the Configure Archiving Subprofile dialog box, click the Indexing tab, and
then click Add > Import from Content Server.

3. Sign in to Content Server. For more information, see “Defining the sign in to
Content Server” on page 212.

4. In the Import Attributes dialog box, the available Cascading Attributes profiles
are displayed. Select the required profile, and then click Import.

Notes
• The update script of such fields is automatically filled when importing
from Content Server. This update script can later be extended by user
scripts but it must not be deleted. Otherwise functionality is lost, for
example the dependency between fields.
• Fields must not be renamed after import.

12.3.3.2 Importing Records Management attributes


Enterprise Scan enables you to import Records Management attributes for indexing
and releasing to Content Server using the Document Pipeline for Content Server.

Prerequisite The Records Management attributes to be imported must have the Show option
selected for Add Item Page. This needs to be configured in Content Server, see
OpenText Records Management - Administering Records Management (LLESRCM-H-
AGD). Enterprise Scan communicates with Content Server through web services.
Therefore, the Records Management web service needs to be installed and
configured for Content Server. For more information about supported versions, see
Release Notes for Content Server.

To import Records Management attributes for indexing:

1. Go to the profile you want to configure. For more information, see “To
configure indexing and archiving:“ on page 127.

138 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
12.3. Configuring indexing

Tip: Alternatively, if you want to configure the current profile, click


Profile > Configure Archiving.
2. In the Configure Archiving Subprofile dialog box, click the Indexing tab, and
then click Add > Import from Content Server.
3. Sign in to Content Server. For more information, see “Defining the sign in to
Content Server” on page 212.
4. In the Import Attributes dialog box, select the Include RM attributes check
box.

Tips
• The Tree view in the Import Attributes dialog box is not relevant for
importing Records Management attributes.
• You can combine importing Records Management attributes with
importing Content Server attributes. For more information, see
“Importing Content Server attributes” on page 137.
5. Click Import to import all Records Management attributes that have the Add
Item Page property from Content Server.
Enterprise Scan supports importing the following Records Management
attributes:

• Record Date
• Status
• Status Date
• Received Date
• Mark Official
• Storage Medium
• Accession
• Subject
• Author or Originator
• Addressee(s)

Note: Enterprise Scan does not support importing the following Records
Management attributes:
• Record Type
• RSI
• Other Addressee(s)
• Update Cycle Period
• Originating Organization

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 139


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 12 Configuring indexing and archiving

Also cross-reference attributes corresponding to the XReference tab on the


document properties page are not supported.

The imported Records Management attributes are mapped to the corresponding


indexing fields and are shown in the indexing mask.

Each Records Management attribute name gets an RM prefix in the indexing


field. The additional mandatory indexing field RM:Classification is added to
the Indexing tab.

6. Click OK.
In the Indexing view, the Classification field is displayed as a special field that
allows you to select the Records Management classification for the current
document.

140 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
12.3. Configuring indexing

Once the document is released from Enterprise Scan to Content Server through
the Document Pipeline for Content Server, the Records Management attributes
are written to the IXATTR file for further processing by the Document Pipeline
for Content Server module.

Note: Enterprise Scan does not support importing of default classification


values. If you want to use default classification values, you must enter the
values manually in the Initialization script.

To select the Records Management classification in the Indexing view:

Note: You can only select RM:Classification that are defined in Content
Server.

1. Click the icon next to the Classification field.


2. In the Classifications list, select one of the following methods to import the
classification:

Browse Classification
In the Classifications Tree, browse through the available Records
Management classifications and select the appropriate one.
My Favorites
In the Classifications Tree, select a classification from the Favorites list.
User Pick List
In the Classifications Tree, select a classification from the list of
classifications that are available to the user.
Group Pick List
In the Classifications Tree, select a classification from the list of
classifications that are available to the group.

12.3.3.3 Indexing attributes with multiple rows from Content Server


To index attributes with multiple rows from Content Server:

1. Import attributes from Content Server. For more information, see “Importing
Content Server attributes” on page 137.
2. Configure the field parameters of each attribute. For more information, see
“Configuring custom index fields” on page 133.
3. Go to the profile you want to configure. For more information, see “To
configure indexing and archiving:“ on page 127.

Tip: Alternatively, if you want to configure the current profile, click


Profile > Configure Archiving.
4. In the Configure Archiving Subprofile dialog box, click the Indexing tab.
5. Mark the indexing field you want to change, and then click Edit.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 141


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 12 Configuring indexing and archiving

6. In the Configure Field dialog box, enter the number of rows (Count) to be
displayed initially in the Indexing view for the attribute. The minimum value is
1.

Note: The initial number at Count corresponds with the “default” value
defined for the attribute with multiple rows in Content Server.
The default value for a attribute with multiple rows results from the
default value definition inside the corresponding category in Content
Server. Items with an index between “default” and “max” do not have a
default value because this value is not defined in Content Server.

7. Define a Maximum number of rows. Otherwise, check Locked to make sure


that the number of lines cannot be changed in the Indexing view.

8. In the Indexing view, you can add as many new rows as are defined in the
“max” parameter for the respective attribute in Content Server. Click the plus
icon near the appropriate indexing field. Use the minus icon to reduce
number of rows.

Note: An overflow of the “max” number can occur, when the number of
rows added in the Indexing view exceeds the maximum available count of
rows for a attribute with multiple rows defined in Content Server. The
scan operator should know the “max” number of rows to avoid this
problem.

Supported attribute types

Indexing attributes with multiple rows is supported for the following attribute
types:

Type Possible display type in the Indexing view


Date: Field
Date: Popup
Flag: Checkbox
Integer: Field
Integer: Popup
Real: Field
String: Field
String: Multiline
String: Popup
User: Field
Classification: Field

142 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
12.3. Configuring indexing

Scripting

Selection, Validation, and Update scripts are triggered for every item in the array.
Initialization scripts are called just once.

The following methods or properties for field objects are available in the
Initialization, Selection, and Validation or Update scripts:

Field.Count: Gets the number of fields in the array.


Field.Current: Gets the current index in the array (0-based index).
Field.GetValue(index): Returns the value of the field with a given index.
Field.SetValue(index, value): Sets the value of the field with a given index.
Field.Value: Can be used to set or get a field value (first index for
arrays).

For details about scripting, see “Working with scripts for indexing and archiving“
on page 251.

Attributes with multiple rows of Set type

Because a Set can include nested attributes with multiple rows, Enterprise Scan can
only import the first row of a Set with multiple rows. However, the feature with
multiple rows for each individual attribute in this first row of the set is fully
supported.

Limitations

Indexing of attributes with multiple rows is not supported for the following:
• Export script plug-ins. For more information, see “Scripts in the export
phase” on page 258.
• Document Pipeline for Content Server. For more information, see “Archiving
documents on Content Server using Document Pipeline” on page 171.
• Existing archiving subprofiles. In order to use this functionality for existing
subprofiles you must re-import the indexing fields from Content Server or
edit them manually in the Configure Field dialog box. To do so, clear the
Locked check box, and then set the appropriate values for Count and
Maximum.
• Date: Calendar Attribute

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 143


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 12 Configuring indexing and archiving

12.3.3.4 Indexing the Content Server User attribute type


As a prerequisite the User attribute must be selected in the Configure Field dialog
box. For more information, see “Configuring custom index fields” on page 133. Then
a text field similar to the one in the following screenshot is displayed in the Indexing
view.

To index the Content Server User attribute type:

1. Click the User icon to the right of the text field to open the Select User dialog
box.

2. Select a search parameter, such as User Last Name, enter a search term in the
field, and then click Find.
The search is performed in the Content Server User Database.
3. Select the user from the listed results, and then click OK.

12.3.4 Importing Oracle Web Service attributes


You can import attributes from the Oracle Web Service and using these attributes for
indexing.

To import Oracle Web Service attributes:

1. Go to the profile you want to configure. For more information, see “To
configure indexing and archiving:“ on page 127.

Tip: Alternatively, if you want to configure the current profile, click


Profile > Configure Archiving.

2. In the Configure Archiving Subprofile dialog box, click the Indexing tab, and
then click Add > Import from Oracle.

144 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
12.3. Configuring indexing

3. In the Oracle Attributes dialog box, open the InvoiceInfoType node.

Tips
• To expand all nodes, click Expand All.
• To collapse all nodes, click Collapse All.

The bullet icon indicates a simple field that provides the following
information:

• The attribute name, for example billBackStatus, that is used as the label for
the indexing field in the Indexing view.
• The data type, for example String.
• If the field can be used for indexing one time or often: Single or Multiple.

The icon indicates a complex field that contains one or more simple or
complex fields that provides the following information:

• The attribute name, for example BillBack, that is used as the label for a
group of indexing fields in the Indexing tab.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 145


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 12 Configuring indexing and archiving

• If the field can be used for indexing one time or often: Single or Multiple.

4. To use a field often for indexing, right-click the respective line, and then click
Input Count.

5. In the Count dialog box, enter the number of times you want the field to be
displayed in the Indexing view, and then click Ok.

6. Repeat Step 4 and Step 5 for all fields you want to use often for indexing.

7. Click Import.
All Oracle attributes (simple fields) are imported in the Indexing tab of the
Configure Archiving Subprofile dialog box, using the following mapping:

Name
Oracle:InvoiceInfo.<complex field name> (may be more than
one):<single field name>

Example: Oracle:InvoiceInfo.BillBack.tenant:tenantName

In case you have defined some fields to be displayed often in the Indexing
view, index numbers are added to the field name.

Example: Oracle:InvoiceInfo.attachment1:description
Oracle:InvoiceInfo.attachment2:description

Display string
<single field name>, used as label of the indexing field in the Indexing view.

Type
Data type, as indicated in the Oracle Attributes dialog box.

8. Remove the Oracle attributes you do not need from the Indexing fields.

9. To group the indexing fields by complex fields in the Indexing view, select the
Group fields by sets check box.

10. In the Indexing tab, select one line, and then click Edit to edit the script the
indexing fields.
The Configure Field dialog box opens. For more information, see “Configuring
custom index fields” on page 133.

Important
• Do not change the Name indexing field. The exact format is required
to display the fields in the Indexing view.
• The value of Count and Maximum must be 1, and the Locked check
box must be selected.

To specify that the field in the Indexing view must be completed before the
document can be archived, select the Mandatory check box.
In scripting, you can use the following field names:

146 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
12.3. Configuring indexing

Example:

Fields["Oracle:InvoiceInfo.Vendor:VendorID"] = "ID25555";
Fields["Oracle:InvoiceInfo.Vendor:VendorName"] = "Open Text";
Fields["Oracle:InvoiceInfo.Vendor:taxRate"] = "20%";

For a complex field that allows multiple occurrences in the Indexing view, you
can add the index numbers with the field name during scripting.
If you have chosen an Oracle field, for example Reason, to occur multiple times
in the Indexing view, you can reference the particular index numbers (1/2/3/…)
in scripts, like in the following example:

Example:

Oracle:InvoiceInfo.reason1.reasonCode
Oracle:InvoiceInfo.reason2.reasonCode

For details about scripting, see “Working with scripts for indexing and
archiving“ on page 251.

Example 12-1: Oracle indexing configuration and resulting Indexing


view

The following screenshots show a set of Oracle indexing fields in the


Indexing tab and the resulting Indexing view.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 147


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 12 Configuring indexing and archiving

12.3.5 Configuring indexing for SAP


You might want to use the Document Pipeline for DocuLink to archive documents
with indexing attributes for SAP. To perform indexing for SAP, the following
prerequisites have to be met:
• A customer-specific table in SAP must be configured. For more information, see
OpenText DocuLink for SAP Solutions - Customizing and Administration Guide (DC-
CGD).
• The scan scenario must be Early R3 Indexing. For more information, see
“Configuring SAP indexing and archiving scenario” on page 128.
• The Document Pipeline for DocuLink (SCR3) must be installed. For more
information, see section 3.1.1 “Installing Document Pipeline for DocuLink” in
OpenText Document Pipeline - Installation and Upgrade Guide (AR-IDPDP).

148 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
12.3. Configuring indexing

• The archive mode must be configured. For more information, see section 11
“Configuring scan stations” in OpenText Archive Center - Administration Guide
(AR-ACN).

You can configure indexing for SAP in the following ways:


• Manually creating and defining the indexing fields. For more information, see
“Configuring indexing for SAP manually” on page 149.
• Importing attributes from SAP and using these attributes for indexing. For more
information, see “Configuring indexing for SAP with importing of attributes
from SAP” on page 154.

12.3.5.1 Configuring indexing for SAP manually


To configure indexing for SAP:

1. Create templates using DocuLink for the IXATTR file and the COMMANDS file,
using the customer-specific table in SAP. These files control the indexing and
archiving process. For more information, see “Creating templates” on page 149.
2. Adapt the pipeline script scanr3.pl. For more information, see “Adapting
pipeline script” on page 150.
3. Configure indexing information in the Configure Field dialog box. For more
information, see “Configuring indexing information” on page 151.
4. Add a script in the Set Document Pipelines Attributes dialog box. For more
information, see “Adding a Document Pipeline attributes script” on page 152.

Creating In DocuLink customizing, you create templates for the IXATTR file and the COMMANDS
templates file. For more information, see section 10.3.1.1 “General” in OpenText DocuLink for
SAP Solutions - Customizing and Administration Guide (DC-CGD).

To create templates for IXATTR and COMMANDS:

1. In SAP, open the DocuLink Customizing.

2. In the Attribute Objects tab, click in the application tool bar.


3. In the New Attribute Object dialog box, click the General tab.

4. Click Write structure to file .


5. Choose the IXATTR and COMMANDS templates.
6. Select the destination path for the templates.

Example 12-2: IXATTR file template


NEWDOC
R3_CLIENT ZDEMO1|MANDT|CC|%s|
ATTRIBUTES ZDEMO1|KUNDENNUMMER|CC|1234567|
ATTRIBUTES ZDEMO1|RECHNUNGSNUMMER|CC|12345678|

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 149


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 12 Configuring indexing and archiving

ATTRIBUTES ZDEMO1|DATUM|DD|19981111|
ATTRIBUTES ZDEMO1|LIEFERSCHEINNUMMER|NN|123456|
ATTRIBUTES ZDEMO1|BETRAG|CC|124444|
R3_CLIENT TOAV0|MANDT|CC|%s|ZDEMO1|
R3_SAP_OBJ TOAV0|SAP_OBJECT|CC|%s|ZDEMO1|
R3_AR_OBJ TOAV0|AR_OBJECT|CC|%s|ZDEMO1|
ARCHIVIDATTR TOAV0|ARCHIV_ID|CC|%s|ZDEMO1|
DOCIDATTR TOAV0|ARC_DOCID|CC|%s|ZDEMO1|

Example 12-3: COMMANDS file template


DOCTYPE FAX
COMP 1.pg TIFF ........
R3_CLIENT <SAP client name>
R3_DESTINATION <SAP system ID>
R3_SAP_OBJ <SAP object>
R3_AR_OBJ <archive object>
# optional, only necessary for user exits or automatic field
entry in SAP tables using DocuLink:
R3_TABLE_DETAILS <r3_table_name>|<DocuLink project>|
<DocuLink attribute object>

For details on automatic field entry, see section 9.4.4.3 “Automatic entry of
field values using DocuLink” in OpenText Document Pipelines - Overview and
Import Interfaces (AR-CDP).

Adapting After installing Document Pipeline for DocuLink (SCR3), the pipeline script file
pipeline script scanr3.pl is located in: %ProgramFiles%\OpenText\DocuLink Document Pipeline
<version>\scripts\perl\. The change you must perform tells the script that there
is no need to run additional custom scripts for the SCR3 scenario.

To adapt the pipeline script:

1. Go to the scanr3.pl pipeline script file in %ProgramFiles%\OpenText


\DocuLink Document Pipeline <version>\scripts\perl\.

2. Change the following lines to the following:


sub service {
my $docdir = shift;
my $dttype = shift;
IXOS::DTLogging::logmsg(IXOS::DTLogging::_ERROR(), "\n" .
" ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
\n" .
" ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
\n" .
" You have to replace the scanr3.pl script with a project script !!!
\n" .
" ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
\n" .
" ++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++++
\n");
#return(0, "script 'scanr3.pl' has not been replaced by a project script");
return(1, "script 'scanr3.pl' done"); # return success - no need to run

150 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
12.3. Configuring indexing

additional custom scripts


}

Configuring Configure the indexing information manually in the Configure Field dialog box.
indexing
information
To configure indexing information:

1. In the Indexing tab, select one line, and then click Edit.
The Configure Field dialog box opens. For more information, see “Configuring
custom index fields” on page 133.
The parameters you configure for SAP indexing are transferred into an entry in
the IXATTR file. This entry has the following syntax:

ATTRIBUTES <r3_table_name>|<column_name>|<col_type>|<value>|

<r3_table_name>
Name of the SAP table in which entries are to be made.

<column_name>
Name of the column in the SAP table <r3_table_name>.

<col_type>
Data type of the <value>. The following data types are used for SAP
indexing:

CC
Character strings

NN
Character strings comprising numbers only

D2
Standard date format DD.MM.[YY]YY. This is converted to database
format internally.

<value>
Value to be entered either in plain text or as a placeholder specifying the
value type (%s, %d, and so on).

For more information, see section 9.4.4 “IXATTR for SAP applications/
DocuLink” in OpenText Document Pipelines - Overview and Import Interfaces (AR-
CDP).

Important
Whenever the IXATTR file is modified in the Set Document Pipeline
Attributes script, the automatic creation of IXATTR with indexing
information does not take place. In this case, you have to generate the
entire contents for the IXATTR by script manually.

2. To get the desired syntax in the IXATTR file, define the indexing fields in the
Configure Field dialog box the following way:

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 151


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 12 Configuring indexing and archiving

Note: See also Example 12-2, “IXATTR file template” on page 149. The
ATTRIBUTES lines in the template can help to define the fields.

Name
The field name must be <r3_table_name>:<column_name>.

Important
The separator must be a colon. Otherwise indexing will fail.

Type
Your entries in the Type field in the Configure Field dialog result in values
for the <col_type> and <value> parameters in the IXATTR file, according to the
following table:

Type field <col_type> string <value> format in IXATTR


in IXATTR
String CC <input>
Integer NN <input>
Flag CC true or false
Decimal CC <input>
Time CC hh:mm:ss
Date D2 DD.MM.YYYY
DateTime CC DD.MM.YYYY:hh:mm:ss

Figure 12-1: Indexing fields for SAP indexing

Adding a Configure the Document Pipeline attributes manually in the Set Document Pipeline
Document Attributes dialog box. For more information, see “Defining Document Pipeline
attributes” on page 162.

152 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
12.3. Configuring indexing

Pipeline To add a Document Pipeline attributes script:


attributes script
1. Go to the profile you want to configure. For more information, see “To
configure indexing and archiving:“ on page 127.

Tip: Alternatively, if you want to configure the current profile, click


Profile > Configure Archiving.

2. In the Configure Archiving Subprofile dialog box, click the Archiving tab.

3. Add Set Document Pipeline Attributes to the Flow list, and then click
Configure.

4. Type the following script that will be evaluated for the COMMANDS file:

Note: See also Example 12-3, “COMMANDS file template” on page 150.
The template can help you to define the script.

Document.COMMANDS = "R3_SAP_OBJ <SAP object>\n"


Document.COMMANDS += "R3_AR_OBJ <archive object>\n"
Document.COMMANDS += "R3_CLIENT <SAP client name>\n"
Document.COMMANDS += "R3_TABLE_DETAILS <Table name>|<DocuLink
project>|<DocuLink attribute object>"

Most entries in the COMMANDS file are passed directly by Enterprise Scan.
The entries are passed to the COMMANDS file by the Set Document Pipeline
Attributes script, and the link table information is transferred to the IXATTR file.
For a comprehensive description, see section 9.4.4.2 “Entries in SAP link tables”
in OpenText Document Pipelines - Overview and Import Interfaces (AR-CDP).
Examples - The following examples show the IXATTR and COMMANDS files
generated by Enterprise Scan with the indexing fields and the Set Document
Pipeline Attributes script, as described in the previous section:

Example 12-4: IXATTR file produced by Enterprise Scan

NEWDOC
R3_CLIENT ZDEMO1|MANDT|CC|%s|
ATTRIBUTES ZDEMO1|KUNDENNUMMER|CC|1234567|
ATTRIBUTES ZDEMO1|RECHNUNGSNUMMER|CC|12345678|
ATTRIBUTES ZDEMO1|DATUM|D2|08.06.2009|
ATTRIBUTES ZDEMO1|LIEFERSCHEINNUMMER|NN|123456|
ATTRIBUTES ZDEMO1|BETRAG|CC|124444|
R3_CLIENT TOAV0|MANDT|CC|%s|ZDEMO1|
R3_SAP_OBJ TOAV0|SAP_OBJECT|CC|%s|ZDEMO1|
R3_AR_OBJ TOAV0|AR_OBJECT|CC|%s|ZDEMO1|
ARCHIVIDATTR TOAV0|ARCHIV_ID|CC|%s|ZDEMO1|
DOCIDATTR TOAV0|ARC_DOCID|CC|%s|ZDEMO1|

Note: A NEWINSERT entry is generated in the IXATTR file if multiple tables


are referenced in the indexing fields.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 153


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 12 Configuring indexing and archiving

Example 12-5: COMMANDS file produced by Enterprise Scan


DOCTYPE FAX
COMP 1.pg TIFF ........
R3_CLIENT <SAP client name> (Example: 800)
R3_DESTINATION <SAP system ID> (Example: PSD)
R3_SAP_OBJ <SAP object> (Example: YAR_BEL_GH)
R3_AR_OBJ <archive object> (Example: YAR_FAX)
# optional, only necessary for user exits or automatic
field entry in SAP tables using DocuLink:
R3_TABLE_DETAILS <r3_table_name>|<DocuLink project>|
<DocuLink attribute object>

Note: For details on automatic field entry, see section 9.4.4.3 “Automatic
entry of field values using DocuLink” in OpenText Document Pipelines -
Overview and Import Interfaces (AR-CDP).

12.3.5.2 Configuring indexing for SAP with importing of attributes from


SAP
To import SAP attributes:

1. Go to the profile you want to configure. For more information, see “To
configure indexing and archiving:“ on page 127.

Tip: Alternatively, if you want to configure the current profile, click


Profile > Configure Archiving.
2. In the Configure Archiving Subprofile dialog box, click the Indexing tab, and
then click Add > Import from SAP.
3. In the Import Attributes dialog box, expand the content repository where you
want to import attributes.
4. Select the document type, and then click Import.
All SAP attributes are imported in the Indexing tab of the Configure Archiving
Subprofile dialog box, using the following mapping:

Name
ARCHIV_ID:SAP_OBJECT:AR_OBJECT:CLIENT:TABLENAME:FIELDNAME

Example: T5:LFA1:ZT5PDF01:800:ZARCHIVEALPLUS:CREATOR

Display string
<single field name>, used as label of the indexing field in the Indexing view.
Type
Data type, as indicated in the SAP Attributes dialog box.
5. To group the indexing fields by complex fields in the Indexing view, select the
Group fields by sets check box.

154 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
12.3. Configuring indexing

6. In the Indexing tab, select one line, and then click Edit to edit the script the
indexing fields.
The Configure Field dialog box opens. For more information, see “Configuring
custom index fields” on page 133.

Important

• Do not change the Name indexing field. The exact format is required
to display the fields in the Indexing view.
• The value of Count and Maximum must be 1, and the Locked check
box must be selected.

Example:

Fields["T5:LFA1:ZT5PDF01:800:ZARCHIVE_ALPLUS:PIECE"] = 1234;

For details about scripting, see “Working with scripts for indexing and
archiving“ on page 251.

12.3.6 Assigning third party libraries


You can add a reference to third-party libraries (*.dll).

Notes

• Only .NET assemblies are supported. For more information, see “Working
with scripts for indexing and archiving“ on page 251.
• If the referenced library is added with an absolute path, ensure that this path
is also valid on other computers that will use that configuration. If the library
is installed in the <Enterprise Scan Home>\bin directory you can add the
referenced library without path.

To assign third party libraries:

1. Go to the profile you want to configure. For more information, see “To
configure indexing and archiving:“ on page 127.

Tip: Alternatively, if you want to configure the current profile, click


Profile > Configure Archiving.

2. In the Configure Archiving Subprofile dialog box, click the Indexing tab.

3. Click References.

4. Click Browse to select the *.dll file in the file system.


You can modify or strip the path of the selected library or enter the name of the
library in the path field without browsing.

5. Click Add, and then click OK.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 155


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 12 Configuring indexing and archiving

.NET You could have a .NET Framework permission problem because the network shares
Framework only get LocalIntranet permissions, by default.
permission
problem
The easiest workaround is to copy the required *.dll to the <InstallDir>/bin
directory of Enterprise Scan. Otherwise use the extended configuration of your
local .Net Framework to elevate permissions for selected file shares. To do so, use
CasPol.exe, for example.

To reproduce a .NET Framework permission problem:

The following scenario will produce a .NET Framework error:

1. In any of the scripting hooks, reference a *.dll from the network.


2. Write a script that accesses the *.dll, and then click OK.
3. Access the global script from the processing or archiving subprofile.
A .Net Framework error message, similar to the following, is displayed.

To elevate permissions for selected file shares using CasPol.exe:

• Use CasPol.exe to fully trust shares that you control and that you know are
safe. However, due to the CasPol syntax, the command to trust shares is not
immediately obvious. To trust everything on the \\FS01\Tools share, use the
CasPol.exe -m -ag 1.2 -url file://\\FS01/Tools/* FullTrust command.
Parameter explanation

-m
Modifies the computer level of the policy. This is needed because the
machine level is where all of the default policy lives.

156 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
12.3. Configuring indexing

-ag 1.2
Adds a code group under group 1.2. In the default policy, group 1.2 is the
LocalIntranet group, so the new code group that you are creating will
only be checked if the file comes from the intranet.

-url file://\\FS01/Tools/*
Sets the membership condition for the new code group as an
UrlMembership condition. It should match anything with a URL that starts
with file://FS01/Tools, meaning that any file on the \\FS01\Tools
share will match this code group.

FullTrust
Sets the permission to be granted to assemblies that match the code group.

12.3.7 Assigning zooming areas to indexing fields


For every indexing field, you can assign a rectangular zooming area that will be
displayed in addition to the full page view.

Note: The rectangular area is automatically displayed in the Index Item view
when the input focus is in the corresponding index field in the Indexing view.

To assign a rectangular zooming area:

1. Go to the profile you want to configure. For more information, see “To
configure indexing and archiving:“ on page 127.

Tip: Alternatively, if you want to configure the current profile, click


Profile > Configure Archiving.

2. In the Configure Archiving Subprofile dialog box, click the Indexing tab.

3. Click Field areas.

4. In the Configure Area Set dialog box, navigate to the document page represents
the documents that should be processed with this profile.

5. Click Add.
A rectangle is added to the page and a new row is added to the List of
rectangles.

6. Move the rectangle to the correct position and define the size.

7. Select the index field for which this area is valid in the list located in the
Indexing field column.

8. Click OK.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 157


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 12 Configuring indexing and archiving

12.4 Configuring a Pre-Archive script


You can write a Pre-Archive script that is called once per export session. Every time
the end user confirms the Archive command, the script is performed before the
documents are passed to the export flow.

To configure a Pre-Archive script:

1. Go to the profile you want to configure. For more information, see “To
configure indexing and archiving:“ on page 127.

Tip: Alternatively, if you want to configure the current profile, click


Profile > Configure Archiving.
2. In the Configure Archiving Subprofile dialog box, click the Pre-Archive Script
tab, and then click Edit.
3. In the Configure Pre-Archive Script dialog box, enter the script in the Script
field.

• Use Load, Save, and Compile to open, store, and test the scripts.
• Use References to add a reference to third party libraries. For more
information, see “Assigning third party libraries” on page 155.
• You can share, export, and import global functions. For more information,
see “Sharing, exporting, and importing the configuration“ on page 199. If
you import global functions to a computer that already has global functions,
the imported functions will be appended to the existing functions.

Example: To access document attributes and conditionally cancel archiving:

1. Assume you have five documents with the following attributes on the stack:

# Index Pages Batch


1 IND01 3 B01
2 IND02 3 B02
3 IND03 1
4 IND04 1 B01
5 IND05 1

2. In the Configure Pre-Archive Script dialog box, add ScanDocumentModel.dll


to the References, which is located at <Enterprise Scan Home>\bin\.
3. Add a script to the Configure Pre-Archive Script dialog box.
You can find the scripting example To access document attributes and
conditionally cancel archiving using Pre-Archive Scripting in the
Scripting Examples > Pre-Archive Script Examples section in the Indexing and
Scripting Guide in OpenText Developer Network (OTDN) (https://
knowledge.opentext.com/go/EnterpriseScan_OTDN).

158 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
12.5. Configuring archiving

4. Select documents 2, 3, and 4.


Click Archive, and then click OK in the Archive Documents dialog box.
The following Archiving details dialog box is displayed.

Alternatively, click Archive All, and then click OK in the Archive Documents
dialog box.
The following Archiving details dialog box is displayed.

12.5 Configuring archiving


You can define the steps that have to be performed before the archiving and the
archiving target destination.

To configure archiving:

1. Go to the profile you want to configure. For more information, see “To
configure indexing and archiving:“ on page 127.

Tip: Alternatively, if you want to configure the current profile, click


Profile > Configure Archiving.

2. In the Configure Archiving Subprofile dialog box, click the Archiving tab.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 159


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 12 Configuring indexing and archiving

3. In the Operations area, click the appropriate operations, and then click Add.

4. Correct the order of the operation in the Flow field with Up and Down.

Notes
• The document processing operations must be performed before the
document export operations.
• There must be exactly one document export operation and it must be
the last operation in the flow.

5. Select the appropriate operation in the Flow area, and then click Configure to
define the properties of the operation:
Document processing

Add Document Attributes


Allows a modification of the indexing information for the document by
using a .NET script. For more information, see “Configuring additional
document attributes” on page 161.

Delete Marked Pages


Deletes the pages that are marked for deleting. For more information, see
“Configuring deletion of marked pages” on page 162.

Set Document Pipeline Attributes


Defines attributes for the Document Pipeline. For more information, see
“Defining Document Pipeline attributes” on page 162.

Document Export

Capture Center
Exports documents to the Capture Center for OCR. Renders, validates, and
archives documents through an interface. For more information, see
“Exporting to Capture Center” on page 163.

160 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
12.5. Configuring archiving

Capture Center (via shared folder)


Exports documents to the Capture Center for OCR. Renders, validates, and
archives documents using shared folders. For more information, see
“Exporting to Capture Center through a shared folder” on page 165.
Content Server
Archives the documents in Content Server. For more information, see
“Archiving documents on Content Server” on page 166.
Document Pipeline for Content Server
Archives the documents in Content Server using Document Pipeline. This
has the advantage that you can render the document, use OCR, and so on.
For more information, see “Archiving documents on Content Server using
Document Pipeline” on page 171.
Document Pipeline for SAP
Archives the documents in Archive Center. For more information, see
“Archiving with the Document Pipeline for SAP” on page 172.
Document Pipeline for TCP
Archives the documents in Archive Center. For more information, see
“Archiving with the Document Pipeline for TCP” on page 176.
External Storage
Archives the documents for data exchange to an external storage. For more
information, see “Archiving to external storage” on page 178.
6. Click Validate to check the flow for correctness.
7. Click Ok.

12.5.1 Configuring additional document attributes


You can configure a script to modify the document indexing information before
archiving.

For details about scripting, see “Working with scripts for indexing and archiving“
on page 251.

To configure additional document attributes:

1. Go to the profile you want to configure. For more information, see “To
configure indexing and archiving:“ on page 127.

Tip: Alternatively, if you want to configure the current profile, click


Profile > Configure Archiving.
2. In the Configure Archiving Subprofile dialog box, click the Archiving tab.
3. Add Add Document Attributes to the Flow list, and then click Configure.
4. Enter the script in the Script field.

• Use Load, Save, and Compile to open, store, and test the script.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 161


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 12 Configuring indexing and archiving

• Use References to add a reference to third party libraries. For more


information, see “Assigning third party libraries” on page 155.
• Use Open Global Function Depot to open the Global Function Depot,
where you can collect all your Enterprise Scan scripts. For more information,
see “Global function depot” on page 260.

12.5.2 Configuring deletion of marked pages


You can delete previously marked pages automatically before the document is
archived.

To configure deletion of marked pages:

1. Go to the profile you want to configure. For more information, see “To
configure indexing and archiving:“ on page 127.

Tip: Alternatively, if you want to configure the current profile, click


Profile > Configure Archiving.

2. In the Configure Archiving Subprofile dialog box, click the Archiving tab.

3. Add Delete Marked Pages to the Flow list, and then click Configure.

4. Select the appropriate marker type, and then click OK:

• delete for the delete marker.

• quality for the bad quality marker.

• bookmark for the bookmark marker.

The Default marker is the delete marker.

12.5.3 Defining Document Pipeline attributes


You can add a script to define the attributes of the Document Pipeline. For example,
you can add extra entries into the IXATTR file and the COMMANDS file that will be
generated while archiving using Document Pipeline.

For details about scripting, see “Working with scripts for indexing and archiving“
on page 251.

To configure Document Pipeline attributes:

1. Go to the profile you want to configure. For more information, see “To
configure indexing and archiving:“ on page 127.

Tip: Alternatively, if you want to configure the current profile, click


Profile > Configure Archiving.

2. In the Configure Archiving Subprofile dialog box, click the Archiving tab.

162 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
12.5. Configuring archiving

3. Add Set Document Pipeline Attributes to the Flow list, and then click
Configure.

4. Type the script in the Script field.

• Use Load, Save, and Compile to open, store, and test the script.
• Use References to add a reference to third party libraries. For more
information, see “Assigning third party libraries” on page 155.
• Use Open Global Function Depot to open the Global Function Depot,
where you can collect all your Enterprise Scan scripts. For more information,
see “Global function depot” on page 260.

12.5.4 Exporting to Capture Center


When you export documents to Capture Center, OCR, rendering, validation, and
archiving is delegated to Capture Center. The images and their attributes are
transferred using an interface. The separation in documents can be done by
Enterprise Scan or by Capture Center.

Enterprise Scan uses an OCC Profile (OpenText Capture Center Profile) configured
on the Capture Center Server. If the profile does not exist, the export from Enterprise
Scan fails and displays a time out message. To avoid this, you must first configure
Capture Center and prepare it for importing documents. Afterwards, you can
proceed with the configuration in Enterprise Scan.

To configure the export to Capture Center:

1. Go to the profile you want to configure. For more information, see “To
configure indexing and archiving:“ on page 127.

Tip: Alternatively, if you want to configure the current profile, click


Profile > Configure Archiving.

2. In the Configure Archiving Subprofile dialog box, click the Archiving tab.

3. Add Capture Center to the Flow list, and then click Configure.

4. Define the settings, and then click OK.

Server name
Server name of Capture Center.

Protocol

• net.tcp
• net.tcp secure
• http
• https

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 163


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 12 Configuring indexing and archiving

Port number
Port number of Capture Center.

Profile
Select the Capture Center profile from the list of configured profiles on
Capture Center Server.
You can edit the profile name if the configured profiles cannot be retrieved
from the selected Capture Center Server.
It is possible to assign the name of the profile dynamically: Use a pattern
like <BATCH>, <FOLDER>, or <fieldname>. On Capture Center Server, the
pattern will be replaced with the real value.

Export loose pages


Select this checkbox to scan and export the pages as loose pages to Capture
Center, without separation in documents. You have to do further
processing/separation of the pages in Capture Center.

Note: Selecting Export loose pages you cannot use document index
fields. Only global fields are allowed. The global fields are exported as
batch fields. If a configuration includes document fields, an error is
reported and archiving is aborted.

Additional content that is transferred to Capture Center

In addition to the scanned images, the following text information is exported to


Capture Center.

Global fields are exported as new batch fields and, for document export without
option Export loose pages, in document as strings.

Note: For the export to batch fields, the Enterprise Scan data types are
converted to Capture Center data types. Information about unsupported fields
is added to log file. For loose pages export, an error message is still shown and
export is aborted.

Field name Value Comment


_SCAN_HOST <Computer name> The scan station’s computer
name.
_SCAN_USER <User name> The scan operator’s login name.
_SCAN_TIME <Date and time> Date and time of scanning.
Example:
2010-03-23
12:40:09Z
_SCAN_INDEX <Document index> The document index.
_SCAN_BATCH <Batch name> The batch name is determined by
processing or user.

164 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
12.5. Configuring archiving

Field name Value Comment


_SCAN_FOLDER <Folder name> The folder name is determined by
processing or user.
_SCAN_GROUP <Group name> The group name is determined by
processing or user.
_SCAN_BARCODE <Barcode type>:<Barcode A document may contain more
value> than one barcode. Additional
Example: barcodes are stored as
Code39 Standard: alternatives.
6505A256
_SCAN_BARCODE2D <2D barcode type>:<2D A document may contain more
barcode value> than one 2D barcode. Additional
Example: 2D barcodes are stored as
Data Matrix: alternatives.
307043007002991022
5100000
_SCAN_PATCHCODE <Patchcode name> A document may contain more
Example: than one patch code. Additional
Patch VI patch codes are stored as
alternatives.
<Indexing field name> <Indexing field value> The indexing field name is
Example: Example: specified by indexing
Location Waterloo configuration dialog. See the note
below.

Note: Capture Center field names must be XML compliant element names.
However, Enterprise Scan does not implement this restriction so that you can
configure indexing field names that are not valid in Capture Center and thus
the export to Capture Center will fail. Ensure that indexing field names match
the following regular expression:
<Indexing field name> = [_a-zA-Z][-_.0-9a-zA-Z]{0,99}

See also “Working with regular expressions“ on page 273.

12.5.5 Exporting to Capture Center through a shared folder


When you export documents to Capture Center, OCR, rendering, validation, and
archiving is delegated to Capture Center. The images and their attributes are stored
for handover in a shared folder (directory). After receipt, Capture Center removes
the stored files from the shared folder.

In regular configurations, the path to the shared folder has the following syntax:
\\<server name>\OpenTextCaptureCenterData\<profile name>

This folder is created and configured by Capture Center. If the folder does not exist,
the export from Enterprise Scan fails and displays an error message. To avoid this,
configure Capture Center first and prepare it for importing document. Afterwards,
proceed with the configuration in Enterprise Scan.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 165


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 12 Configuring indexing and archiving

To configure the export to Capture Center:

1. Go to the profile you want to configure. For more information, see “To
configure indexing and archiving:“ on page 127.

Tip: Alternatively, if you want to configure the current profile, click


Profile > Configure Archiving.

2. In the Configure Archiving Subprofile dialog box, click the Archiving tab.

3. Add Capture Center (via shared folder) to the Flow list, and then click
Configure.

4. Define the settings, and then click OK.

Server name
Server name of Capture Center.

Port number
Port number of Capture Center.

Custom directory
If the path does not match the syntax above, select the Custom directory
check box and enter the directory in the Directory field.

Additional content that is transferred to Capture Center

In addition to the scanned images, the text information is exported to Capture


Center by listed fields. For more information, see the table in “Exporting to Capture
Center” on page 163.

Note: Capture Center field names must be XML compliant element names.
However, Enterprise Scan does not implement this restriction so that you can
configure indexing field names that are not valid in Capture Center and thus
the export to Capture Center will fail. Ensure that indexing field names match
the following regular expression:
<Indexing field name> = [_a-zA-Z][-_.0-9a-zA-Z]{0,99}

See also “Working with regular expressions“ on page 273.

12.5.6 Archiving documents on Content Server


To configure this scenario, you define Content Server and the folder to which the
documents will be archived.

Note: The Scan & Index function is only available for the Folder object type.
The function is not supported for other object types, for example Document,
Discussion, Project, Channel, and so on.

166 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
12.5. Configuring archiving

To archive documents on Content Server:

1. Go to the profile you want to configure. For more information, see “To
configure indexing and archiving:“ on page 127.

Tip: Alternatively, if you want to configure the current profile, click


Profile > Configure Archiving.
2. In the Configure Archiving Subprofile dialog box, click the Archiving tab.
3. Add Content Server to the Flow list, and then click Configure.
4. In the Document tab in the Configure Export to Content Server dialog box, do
the following:

a. For Root, define the target folder on Content Server where the documents
will be archived.

i. Select the Always prompt to select root folder before archiving check
box to open the Select Folder dialog box after pressing Archive where
you can select or accept the target folder on Content Server.

Tips
• After pressing Archive the Content Server Sign In dialog box
opens if you are not yet signed in to Content Server.
• For the first archiving the configured target folder is opened
in the Select Folder dialog box. Subsequent archiving opens

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 167


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 12 Configuring indexing and archiving

the Select Folder dialog box with the last selected target
folder but the configuration of the target folder remains
unchanged in Root.
• If you are using the Content Server workflow with the
Workflow only option the Select root folder before archiving
option is unavailable because the document is attached to the
workflow only and not archived.
ii. Click Browse, and then sign in to Content Server.
iii. In the Select Folder dialog box, select the target Content Server folder,
and then click OK.

Important
• All folders with at least READ permission are listed. Make
sure that the selected folder has sufficient rights for
archiving. Otherwise archiving will not be possible.
If you sign in as a user without administrator privileges,

you are only entitled to archive into your Personal


Workspace in Content Server. However, you can bypass
this restriction by using anonymous submission. For more
information, see “Using Impersonate or Anonymous
Submission for Document Pipeline for Content Server”
on page 213.
b. For Dynamic Folder, specify the path to the folder where the files will be
archived.

• Click Insert to define a syntax, for example


<INDEX><GROUP><USER><COMPUTER>. Each variable will be replaced
with the real values during archiving.
To define a folder hierarchy, use the colon (“:”) as a separator. Each
colon specifies a new directory level.

Note: The archiving procedure will be aborted if the indexing


field values included in <> are not replaced with real values in
the indexing form.
c. For Document Name, specify the document name.

• Click Insert to define a syntax, for example


<INDEX><GROUP><USER><COMPUTER>. Each variable will be replaced
with the real values during archiving.

Notes
• The archiving procedure will be aborted if the indexing field
values included in <> are not replaced with real values in the
indexing form.
• Some characters are not valid in a document name. Therefore,
ensure your selection in this dialog box does not generate

168 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
12.5. Configuring archiving

invalid characters. For a list of invalid characters, see the


Content Server documentation.
• Enterprise Scan supports Unicode for folders and documents
with multi-lingual names while archiving, for example
Chinese, Japanese, Arabic, and Latvian. As shown in the
screenshot, you can choose and specify multi-lingual folders
and file names. The same multi-lingual names will be created
or updated in Content Server.

d. Select the Create new version if already exists check box to create a new
version of an existing document.
If the document does not exist, a new document will be created. If this
option is not selected and a document with the same name already exists,
the archiving will be aborted.

e. Select the Use strict mode for archival check box to stop archiving of
documents if the required attributes of the target folder in Content Server
are not provided.

Tip: If this setting is selected and Enterprise Scan stops the archiving
procedure you can import the attributes before archiving. For more
information, see “Importing Content Server attributes” on page 137.

Notes

• Use strict mode for archival only works for direct archiving to
Content Server.
• Only category attributes are supported.
• System node attributes, and workflow attributes are not supported.

f. Use document connection details for archival defines which connection


parameters (server name, port) are used to establish the session with
Content Server.
When a document is archived at Content Server using Document Pipeline,
connection parameters for Content Server are necessary. These parameters
are configured both, in Enterprise Scan (see “Configuring Server and
Document Pipeline settings” on page 209) and in Document Pipeline (see
OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan - Installation Guide (CLES-IGD)).
Select this option if you want to archive the documents using the
connection details given in Enterprise Scan. Clear this option to use the
Document Pipeline configuration to establish the connection.

g. Click Advanced to adjust the output file format as described in “Defining


advanced settings for archiving” on page 179.

5. In the Content Server Workflow tab, do the following to configure the Content
Server workflow:

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 169


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 12 Configuring indexing and archiving

a. Select Start workflow.


b. In the Attach a document as area, click the appropriate option to specify
how you want to attach the documents to the workflow.
c. Click Browse to select the Workflow map in Content Server.
d. Click Insert to define the syntax for the Workflow name, for example
<INDEX><GROUP><USER><COMPUTER>. Each variable will be replaced with
the real values during archiving.

Note: The archiving procedure will be aborted if the indexing field


values included in <> are not replaced with real values in the indexing
form.
e. Click Advanced to adjust the output file format as described in “Defining
advanced settings for archiving” on page 179.

6. Click OK.

170 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
12.5. Configuring archiving

12.5.7 Archiving documents on Content Server using


Document Pipeline
Additionally to the “Archiving documents on Content Server” scenario you can
generate searchable PDF files using the OpenText Rendition Server.

You can also use the Searchable PDF Doctool to store scanned documents as
searchable PDF files in Content Server using Document Pipeline. For more
information, see “Searchable PDF Doctool“ on page 287.

Notes
• The Scan & Index function is only available for the Folder object type. The
function is not supported for other object types, for example Document,
Discussion, Project, Channel, and so on.
• Software and licenses for Rendition Server must be purchased separately.
Contact your OpenText sales representative for more information.
• For supported versions of Document Pipelines, Content Server and
Rendition Server, see Release Notes.
• When changing the Document Pipeline for Content Server configuration you
must restart the Spawner service to enable the new sign in session.

You can perform an additional check for the category version before the document
will be archived. To do so, set the variable VERIFYLLCATEGORYVERSION = 1 in the
%PROGRAMDATA%\OpenText\BASE Document Pipeline\config\setup
\DT_DOCTOLES.Setup file, and then restart the Spawner service. With the default
value VERIFYLLCATEGORYVERSION = 0 the document will be archived and then
reverted if the category version does not match. In case the Content Server user does
not have the delete permission, the document will not be reverted.

Prerequisite Document Pipeline for Content Server must be installed. For more information, see
section 6.4.4 “Installing Document Pipeline for Content Server” in OpenText Imaging
Enterprise Scan - Installation Guide (CLES-IGD).

To archive searchable PDF files using Document Pipeline for Content Server:

1. Configure a new archiving profile. For more information, see “Configuring


archiving” on page 159.
2. Go to Profile > Configure Archiving.
3. In the Configure Archiving Subprofile dialog box, click the Archiving tab.
4. Add Document Pipeline for Content Server to the Flow list, and then click
Configure.
5. Define the settings, and then click OK.

Use rendering server


Renders the archived documents to PDF format.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 171


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 12 Configuring indexing and archiving

Note: If you use Rendition Server, the Advanced button in the


Configure Export to Content Server dialog box is disabled. The
output file format is set to the default value of TIFF.

Rendering profile
Defines the rendering profile that you have configured on Rendition Server.
For more information, see OpenText Rendition Server - Installation and
Administration Guide (RS-IGD).
Configure
Specifies the settings for Content Server export. For more information, see
“Archiving documents on Content Server” on page 166.

12.5.8 Archiving with the Document Pipeline for SAP


The R3SC Document Pipeline for SAP files scanned documents and their supported
attributes from Enterprise Scan into SAP Solutions.

In this scenario, documents are written directly to the desired logical archive on
Archive Center by means of the Document Pipeline. The connection from Enterprise
Scan to the Document Pipeline is either established by RPC, using a file system, or
by HTTP/HTTPS, without a local pipeline. For more information, see “Configuring
remote Document Pipelines” on page 174.

Information about the document, such as - the document id and the archive id is
sent to the leading application and assigned to the specific business data of the
leading application.

For more information, see section 9.4.1 “SAP Document Archiving Document
Pipelines” in OpenText Document Pipelines - Overview and Import Interfaces (AR-CDP).

If you are working with Unicode character set in notes, select Use UTF-8 encoding
for note in “Configuring general workstation options” on page 188 to transfer the
notes in Unicode (UTF-8) encoding format.

Important
For all archiving scenarios using Document Pipeline, an archive mode must
be configured in OpenText Administration Client and selected in the
archiving subprofile on the Enterprise Scan workstation.

To configure the Document Pipeline for SAP:

1. Go to the profile you want to configure. For more information, see “To
configure indexing and archiving:“ on page 127.

Tip: Alternatively, if you want to configure the current profile, click


Profile > Configure Archiving.
2. In the Configure Archiving Subprofile dialog box, click the Archiving tab.
3. Add Document Pipeline for SAP to the Flow, and then click Configure.

172 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
12.5. Configuring archiving

4. Define the settings, and then click OK.

Archive server
Displays the name of the Archive Center to which you are connected.

Archive mode
Select the appropriate archive mode from the list of available archive
modes. These archive modes are configured on the selected Archive Center.
If the required archive mode is not available in the list, ask your Archive
Center administrator to create and assign it to the scan station in OpenText
Administration Client.
Click Details to view the configuration properties of the selected archive
mode. For more information, see “Viewing archive details for Document
Pipeline” on page 176. Enterprise Scan always uses the Document Pipeline
specified in the archive mode.

Note: Archive modes are automatically downloaded from the


connected Archive Center each time Enterprise Scan starts. If you
change Archive Center in the Tools > Server and Document Pipeline
Settings menu, the archive modes from this Archive Center will not be
available. Restart Enterprise Scan to update the archive modes. For
more information, see “Configuring Server and Document Pipeline
settings” on page 209.

DMS Doctype
This setting is only needed for the Document Pipeline for TCP.

Note Format
Placeholders for a note. During archiving, the placeholders are replaced
with actual values and the note is stored with the document. The note can
contain a note that was sent by the leading application. For a list of
supported placeholders, see “Working with placeholders for notes“
on page 269.
Default Note
You can create a note if a note has not been specified by the leading
application.

Advanced
Adjust the output file format as described in “Defining advanced settings
for archiving” on page 179.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 173


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 12 Configuring indexing and archiving

12.5.8.1 Configuring remote Document Pipelines


Enterprise Scan supports remote document pipelines that use HTTP or HTTPS.
Unlike the locally installed Document Pipelines, Remote Pipeline offers the following
features:
• It is installed on a separate computer.
• It is accessed using HTTP or HTTPS, instead of RPC and file system.
• It pushes the scanned images to the individual pipelines, for example the
Document Pipeline for SAP.

Note: Enterprise Scan always uses the Document Pipeline specified in the
archive mode. If there is no remote pipeline specified in the archive mode or no
archive mode is found, the local pipeline is used.

To configure the remote Document Pipelines:

1. As archive administrator, open OpenText Administration Client, and then click


the Archive Modes tab.

174 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
12.5. Configuring archiving

2. In the Pipeline Host area, select Connect to Pipeline.

3. Set the protocol (HTTP or HTTPS), the pipeline host and the port. For more
information, see “Archive Modes properties” in OpenText Archive Center -
Administration Guide (AR-ACN).

4. Click OK.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 175


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 12 Configuring indexing and archiving

12.5.8.2 Viewing archive details for Document Pipeline


To view archive details for the Document Pipeline:

1. Go to the profile you want to configure. For more information, see “To
configure indexing and archiving:“ on page 127.

Tip: Alternatively, if you want to configure the current profile, click


Profile > Configure Archiving.
2. In the Configure Archiving Subprofile dialog box, click the Archiving tab.
3. Add Document Pipeline for SAP to the Flow, and then click Configure.
4. In the Configure Document Pipeline dialog box, click Details, and then click
OK.
The following properties are displayed, but they are read-only:

Archive Settings
Displays the settings for the selected archive mode. These settings are
defined in the OpenText Administration Client in the Archive Modes tab.
For more information, see “Archive Modes properties” in OpenText Archive
Center - Administration Guide (AR-ACN).
Remote Pipeline
Displays the settings for the remote pipeline, if a remote pipeline is
configured. These settings are defined in the OpenText Administration
Client in the Archive Modes tab. For more information, see “Configuring
remote Document Pipelines” on page 174 and “Archive Modes properties”
in OpenText Archive Center - Administration Guide (AR-ACN).

12.5.9 Archiving with the Document Pipeline for TCP


The SCDMS Document Pipeline for TCP files documents that have been scanned
from Enterprise Scan into TCP. Optionally a process is started with every document
that is processed.

In this scenario, documents are written by means of the Document Pipeline into the
TCP Business Object Layer.

The connection from Enterprise Scan to the Document Pipeline is either established
by RPC, using a file system, or by HTTP/HTTPS, without a local pipeline. For more
information, see “Configuring remote Document Pipelines” on page 174.

For more information, see section 9.5.1 “TCP Document Pipelines” in OpenText
Document Pipelines - Overview and Import Interfaces (AR-CDP).

Important
• For all archiving scenarios using Document Pipeline, an archive mode
must be configured in OpenText Administration Client and selected in
the archiving subprofile on the Enterprise Scan workstation.

176 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
12.5. Configuring archiving

• The TCP Business Object Layer server is configured in the TCP Document
Pipeline configuration, and may be different from the underlying Archive
Center.

To configure the Document Pipeline for TCP:

1. Go to the profile you want to configure. For more information, see “To
configure indexing and archiving:“ on page 127.

Tip: Alternatively, if you want to configure the current profile, click


Profile > Configure Archiving.

2. In the Configure Archiving Subprofile dialog box, click the Archiving tab.

3. Add Document Pipeline for TCP to the Flow, and then click Configure.

4. Define the settings, and then click OK.

Archive server
Displays the name of the Archive Center where the configuration is stored.

Archive mode
Select the desired archive mode. The archive modes are configured on the
connected Archive Center. If the required archive mode is not available on
the list, ask your Archive Center administrator to create and assign it to the
scan station in OpenText Administration Client.
Click Details to view the configuration properties of the selected archive
mode. For more information, see “Viewing archive details for Document
Pipeline” on page 176. Enterprise Scan always uses the Document Pipeline
specified in the archive mode.

Note: Archive modes are automatically downloaded from the


connected Archive Center each time Enterprise Scan starts. If you
change Archive Center in the Tools > Server and Document Pipeline
Settings menu, the archive modes from this Archive Center will not be
available. Restart Enterprise Scan to update the archive modes. For
more information, see “Configuring Server and Document Pipeline
settings” on page 209

DMS Doctype
Select the document type. The document type was configured by the TCP
Modeler and stored on the TCP Business Object Layer (formerly known as
TCP Context Server). This is one of the record types imported in indexing.
The entered value is written into the COMMANDS file under the DMS_DOCTYPE
key.

Note Format
Placeholders for a note. During archiving, the placeholders are replaced
with actual values and the note is stored with the document. The note can
contain a note that was sent by the leading application. For a list of

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 177


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 12 Configuring indexing and archiving

supported placeholders, see “Working with placeholders for notes“


on page 269.

Default Note
You can enter a note here if a note is not specified by the leading
application.

Advanced
Adjust the output file format as described in “Defining advanced settings
for archiving” on page 179.

12.5.10 Archiving to external storage


To archive documents to an external storage, the documents and their group
structure are stored in the file system and not on Archive Center. For example, the
documents could be stored on hard disk on the Enterprise Scan computer, or in a
network directory. For more information configuring the external storage, see
“Configuring an external storage” on page 65.

Note: An external storage allows the scan operator to buffer the output of a
high volume scanning station so that the indexing load can be distributed
across many scan stations. The indexing values cannot be considered while
working with an external storage.

To configure archiving to an external storage:

1. Go to the profile you want to configure. For more information, see “To
configure indexing and archiving:“ on page 127.

Tip: Alternatively, if you want to configure the current profile, click


Profile > Configure Archiving.

2. In the Configure Archiving Subprofile dialog box, click the Archiving tab.

3. Add External Storage to the Flow list, and then click Configure.

4. Define the settings, and then click OK.

Directory
Directory for the external storage where the scanned documents will be
archived.

Name
Name of the external storage.

Archive ID
Name of the archive on Archive Center where the documents are to be
archived later.

Conditions
Specify conditions that must be met in order to store the documents in an
external storage.

178 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
12.5. Configuring archiving

• Barcode: A barcode must exist and document index must be set


accordingly.
• Endorser: Only documents with a stamp are stored.
• Group: The documents must belong to a group.

12.5.11 Defining advanced settings for archiving


You can define the Output File Format, OCR Options, Color Images Quality
settings, and TIFF Encoding Settings for the archived document.

To define advanced settings for archiving:

1. Go to the profile you want to configure. For more information, see “To
configure indexing and archiving:“ on page 127.

Tip: Alternatively, if you want to configure the current profile, click


Profile > Configure Archiving.

2. In the Configure Archiving Subprofile dialog box, click the Archiving tab.

3. Select the operation, add it to the Flow list, and then click Configure.

4. Click Advanced.

5. Define the settings, and then click OK.

Notes
• If you are scanning PDF files and you want to store them in the archive
as PDFs without any modifications, you must select the Transparent
passthrough for PDF check box in the File Import or File Input dialog
box. In this case the Advanced Settings are ignored.
• The Searchable PDF doctool is not supported using OpenText TCP
Document Pipelines.
• Depending on the number of pages, resolution, color depth, and page
size, archiving of a document may take some minutes to complete.
• If you want to use the PDF/A (image), PDF (text), and PDF/A (text)
output formats, the following prerequisites must be fulfilled, depending
on the Document Pipeline you want to use. This is necessary for the
Searchable PDF doctool to work.

Searchable PDF doctool


The Searchable PDF doctool DT_OCR.msi must be installed. This
applies for all supported Document Pipelines. For supported
versions of Document Pipelines, see Release Notes.
You can download the Searchable PDF DocTool <version>.msi
from Knowledge Center (https://knowledge.opentext.com/
knowledge/cs.dll/Open/13055578).

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 179


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 12 Configuring indexing and archiving

For more information, see “Searchable PDF Doctool“ on page 287.

Output File Format


TIFF for B/W, JPEG for color images, TIFF, JPEG 2000
TIFF documents containing more than one page should be handled as
multi-page TIFF files. Therefore, select the TIFF documents as
multipage files check box. Otherwise, each page of the document will
be stored as a single file. TIFF with JPEG compression (colored TIFF)
images are also supported.
If you select TIFF as the output file format, you can enable TIFF
compression 6 mode by selecting the Use TIFF compression 6
(Compatibility Mode) check box. By default, Enterprise Scan uses the
newer TIFF compression 7.
PDF (image)
Enterprise Scan releases the documents to the Document Pipeline as a
multi-page TIFF. The Document Pipeline then converts the TIFF into
PDF. You can read the archived files by using Adobe Reader, but you
cannot search for text in these files.
PDF/A (image)
Enterprise Scan releases the documents to the Document Pipeline as a
multi-page TIFF. The Searchable PDF doctool then converts the TIFF
into PDF/A. You can read the archived files by using Adobe Reader, but
you cannot search for text in these files.
The PDF/A (image) output format complies with the PDF/A-1b
standard.
PDF (text), PDF/A (text)
Enterprise Scan releases the documents to the Document Pipeline as a
multi-page TIFF and includes all parameters required for the OCR
operation. The Searchable PDF doctool then converts the TIFF into PDF
or PDF/A. You can search for text in these files.
You can set some options for the OCR operation in OCR Options.
The PDF/A (text) output format complies with the PDF/A-1b standard.
OCR Options
This area is only enabled if you select the PDF (text) or PDF/A (text) output
format.
Language
Select the language from the list. The recognized characters must have
the same character set as the selected language. To allow less strict rules
for the OCR operation, select the Extend the OCR to recognize special
symbols and characters check box.
Extend the OCR to recognize special symbols and characters
Select this check box if you have selected the English language and you
want to recognize special symbols, such as $, #, %, and ^, as well as
characters from foreign languages, such as German umlauts.

180 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
12.5. Configuring archiving

Note: OpenText recommends that you select this check box.

Color Images Quality


Defines the output quality of the color image. The higher the quality, the
larger the file size.
TIFF Encoding Settings
TIFF documents as multiple files
Releases the TIFF documents as separate files.
Use TIFF compression 6 (Compatibility Mode)
This check box is only enabled if you select the TIFF output format.
Releases the TIFF documents with compression.

12.5.12 Configuring connector for Content Server barcode


module
The barcode module for Content Server allows you to generate and print barcodes
for Content Server items. Based on this barcode new documents or document
versions can be added automatically to Content Server by Enterprise Scan.

Prerequisites

The following applications must be installed:


• Content Server
• Document Pipeline for Content Server
• Barcode module on Content Server

For supported versions see the Enterprise Scan Release Notes.

Note: Software and licenses for Rendition Server must be purchased


separately. Contact your OpenText sales representative for more information.

Overview The CLM solution enables you to store electronic and scanned documents on
Content Server. CLM consists of a number of components. The relationship between
these components is implemented by means of barcode technology.

How does it CLM contains the barcode module that creates, on user request, a placeholder for a
work? document inside the directory folder of Content Server. The user request is triggered
by selecting the Print Barcode menu item inside the menu of a container object.

The placeholder for the document and the path to that location is then associated
with a barcode value. The barcode module generates a cover letter that includes
information about the document and barcode. The cover letter is printed and
associated with the document. Later the cover letter is scanned with the document
body using Enterprise Scan and processed accordingly. The barcode is recognized
and used for document creation (Separate by barcode) as well as for connecting

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 181


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 12 Configuring indexing and archiving

with the barcode module and converting of the barcode value to the placeholder in
Content Server.

To configure storing searchable PDF files with the barcode module:

1. Configure a new archiving profile. For more information, see “Configuring


archiving” on page 159).

2. Go to Profile > Configure Archiving.

3. In the Configure Archiving Subprofile dialog box, click the Archiving tab.

4. Add Document Pipeline for Content Server to the Flow list, and then click
Configure.

5. In the Configure Document Pipeline for Content Server dialog box, click
Configure.

• Select the Use rendering server check box if you want to render the
archived documents to PDF format. For more information, see “Archiving
documents on Content Server using Document Pipeline” on page 171.

6. In the Configure Export to Content Server dialog box, select Link by barcode.
With this scenario the document is archived into the Content Server placeholder
where the barcode is generated and associated with the document. Additionally
to archiving, you can configure a workflow but the Workflow only option on
the Content Server Workflow tab is disabled as documents should be archived
to a specific placeholder only. For more information, see “Archiving documents
on Content Server” on page 166.

a. Select the Create new version if already exists check box to create a new
version of an existing document.
If the document does not exist, a new document will be created. If this
option is not selected and a document with the same name already exists,
the archiving will be aborted.
b. Select the Use strict mode for archival check box to stop archiving of
documents if the required attributes of the target folder in Content Server
are not provided.

Tip: If this setting is selected and Enterprise Scan stops the archiving
procedure you can import the attributes before archiving. For more
information, see “Importing Content Server attributes” on page 137.

Notes
• Use strict mode for archival only works for direct archiving to
Content Server.
• Only category attributes are supported.
• System node attributes, and workflow attributes are not supported.

182 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
12.5. Configuring archiving

c. Use document connection details for archival defines which connection


parameters (server name, port) are used to establish the session with
Content Server.
When a document is archived at Content Server using Document Pipeline,
connection parameters for Content Server are necessary. These parameters
are configured both, in Enterprise Scan (see “Configuring Server and
Document Pipeline settings” on page 209) and in Document Pipeline (see
section 6.4.4 “Installing Document Pipeline for Content Server” in OpenText
Imaging Enterprise Scan - Installation Guide (CLES-IGD)).
Select this option if you want to archive the documents using the
connection details given in Enterprise Scan. Clear this option to use the
Document Pipeline configuration to establish the connection.
d. Click Advanced to adjust the output file format as described in “Defining
advanced settings for archiving” on page 179.

Tip: Click Test to verify the availability of the barcode module on Content
Server.

7. Click OK.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 183


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 12 Configuring indexing and archiving

12.5.13 Configuring the LLCATEGORY4FOLDERS variable


When using Document Pipeline for Content Server it is possible to change the
behavior of the associations of categories with the dynamically created folders
defined in the archiving sub-profile.

To define associations of categories with the dynamically created Content


Server folders:

1. In the C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Open Text


\BASE Document Pipeline\config\setup\DT_DOCTOLES.Setup file, set the
variable LLCATEGORY4FOLDERS = <0|1>:

LLCATEGORY4FOLDERS=0
Modified attribute values are not assigned to the newly created dynamic
folders.

LLCATEGORY4FOLDERS=1
Modified attribute values are assigned to the newly created dynamic
folders.

2. Restart the Spawner service.

184 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Part 3
Administration tasks
Chapter 13

Configuring workstation options

You can set parameters that are valid for the current user, as well as the profiles and
subprofiles assigned to this user.

These settings are stored in the registry in HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\IXOS


\IXOS_ARCHIVE\6.0\Scan\HKLM. You can share, export, and import these settings.

Caution
Be very careful when changing registry entries, because errors in the
registry can disrupt the functionality of your computer.

Tip: If you require additional help with technical problems, contact OpenText
Customer Support. You can find the contact information for your region at
http://www.opentext.com/support.

13.1 Configuring the path to the storage and


thumbnails cache
To configure the path to the storage and thumbnails cache:

• In the registry at
HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\IXOS\IXOS_ARCHIVE\6.0\Scan\HKLM
\CustomSettings, enter the path to the storage, for example
"S:StoragePath"="%HOMEDRIVE%\\OpenText\\%user%\\storage", and the
path to the thumbnails cache, for example
"S:PageThumbnailsPath"="%HOMEDRIVE%\\OpenText\\%user%\
\thumbnails".

Caution
• If these registry keys do not exist or the paths to the storage and
thumbnails cache are not accessible, the default paths in the
LocalApplicationData folder are used, typically this is the
LocalApplicationData folder below %USERPROFILE%.
• OpenText recommends not to use a storage path on the network share.
Instead keep the storage path on the local file system.
• Use a user specific path, that is a different path for all users.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 187


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 13 Configuring workstation options

13.2 Configuring general workstation options


To configure general workstation options:

1. Click Tools > Workstation Options.


2. In the Configure Workstation Options dialog box, click the General tab.
3. Define the settings, and then click OK.

Show notice before configuration update


The user is notified of configuration changes when starting Enterprise Scan
and can accept or refuse the changes.
If the checkbox is cleared, the configuration is updated automatically
without notification.
Skip Archive Confirmation dialog
Starts archiving immediately, without showing the Archive Documents
dialog box. For more information, see “Indexing and archiving documents“
on page 47.
Log usage statistics
Triggers the statistics function of Enterprise Scan. For more information, see
“Logging Enterprise Scan usage statistics” on page 223.
Log archiving operations
Activates the logging of archived documents. For more information, see
“Logging Enterprise Scan usage statistics” on page 223.
Enable Undo
Disable and enable the Undo and Redo functions in the Edit menu.
Max. Undo level
Number of actions that can be reversed. The upper limit is 100.
Clear global indexing fields
The global index fields are emptied when you switch to another profile or
restart Enterprise Scan.
Show static and empty batches/folders in Tree View
Adds every static batch node defined in the Static Batches tab and every
static folder defined in the Static Folders tab to the Tree view.
Additionally every folder name which is set for any document is added as a
folder node to every batch node in the Tree view.
If you have selected or cleared this setting, or modified the static batch or
static folder entries in the Workstation Options the Tree view must be
updated. For more information, see “Working with the Tree view”
on page 31.

Tip: Use this setting if you are working with drag & drop in the Tree
view because all possible target nodes are present then including
empty nodes and folders, that is unused groups, folders, or batches.

188 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
13.3. Configuring the document index

Use UTF-8 encoding for note


Transfers the note in Unicode (UTF-8) encoding format to support Unicode
character set. Per default Enterprise Scan transfers the note in plain ASCII
characters.

Keep Scan GUI in foreground when invoked by SAP


Defines the behavior when Enterprise Scan is invoked by SAP. After
starting the Enterprise Scan application from SAP GUI and scanning and
archiving a document, it determines whether the focus stays on Enterprise
Scan or SAP GUI returns to the foreground.
This option sets the registry key B:KeepOnTop located in
HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\IXOS\IXOS_ARCHIVE\6.0\Scan\HKLM
\ConfigurationSetting\.

13.3 Configuring the document index


You can configure index behavior and index modification options.

To configure the document index:

1. Click Tools > Workstation Options.

2. In the Configure Workstation Options dialog box, click the Document Index
tab.

3. In the Index can be modified if area, specify the cases in which the index in the
document header can be manually edited, if Barcode recognition is used for
document separation. For more information, see “Changing the index”
on page 39.

• Select the <none> or manually entered check box if no barcode has been
found, or when Barcode recognition is not defined, or when the index has
been entered manually.
• Select the Automatically recognized check box if the barcode has been
recognized and automatically filled in.
• Select the Not recognized check box if a barcode has been found but its type
is not known, or the barcode does not meet the set barcode conditions.

4. In the Validate manual index area, select one of the following options:

• Click Never to prevent Enterprise Scan from automatically verifying that


manually entered index fulfill the set barcode conditions.
• Click Against regular expression to enable automated checking against
regular expressions. Enter the required regular expression. For more
information, see “Working with regular expressions“ on page 273.
• Click Against barcode rules to enable automated checking against barcode
rules. Click Configure to define the barcode settings. For more information,
see Recognition tab on page 94.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 189


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 13 Configuring workstation options

13.4 Configuring global script functions


You can view scripts that are located in the Global Function Depot.

To configure global script functions:

1. Click Tools > Workstation Options.

2. In the Configure Workstation Options dialog box, click the Global Script
Functions tab.

3. Click Edit to open the Global Function Depot. For more information, see
“Global function depot” on page 260.

13.5 Configuring document groups, batches and


folders
To configure document groups, batches, and folders:

1. Click Tools > Workstation Options.

2. In the Configure Workstation Options dialog box, click the Static Groups,
Static Batches or Static Folders tab.

3. Click Insert, and then enter a name to insert static document groups, batches,
and folders.
Then the scan operator can select these defined values in the Group, Batch, and
Folder field of the Properties view.

13.6 Configuring the scanning view


To configure the scanning view:

1. Click Tools > Workstation Options.

2. In the Configure Workstation Options dialog box, click the Scanning tab.

3. Define the settings, and then click OK.

Thumbnails (lower performance)


The Thumbnails view works synchronously. During scanning, you cannot
perform any actions in Enterprise Scan. The number of scanned pages and
the Thumbnails view of the scanned pages is displayed. You can cancel the
scan operation by clicking Stop.

Note: Scanning takes more time than in the other views.

Page
The Page view works synchronously. During scanning, you cannot perform
any actions in Enterprise Scan. The number of scanned pages and the Page

190 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
13.6. Configuring the scanning view

view of the scanned pages is displayed. You can cancel the scan operation
by clicking Stop.

Standard view (background scanning)


The Standard view (background scanning) works asynchronously.
Scanning is performed in the background. In the Scanning in progress
dialog box, the number of scanned pages is displayed. You can cancel the
scan operation by clicking Stop. Thumbnails of the scanned pages are
displayed in the Thumbnails view in the stack.
While the scan procedure is in progress, you can simultaneously work on
documents that have already been scanned, and perform the following
actions:

• Navigate in the stack in the Thumbnails view, in the View view, in the
Tree view, or in the Documents list.
• Add indexing data to documents.
• All actions that are available by right-clicking a page or document.

Note: All actions that modify the document stack are disabled.

Update Interval
Select how often the thumbnail view of the scanned pages is updated.
Selecting a longer interval accelerates the response to the actions that
you are simultaneously performing on the stack.
When Update Interval is set to 0 and the Select last document after
scanning check box is selected, the last scanned page is selected and the
Page view shows the last scanned page. The Page view is updated with
every incoming scanned page during background scanning. If the
Update Interval is greater than zero, then the last scanned document is
selected.
When the Select last document after scanning check box is cleared, the
document selection prior to scanning is retained. If there is no
document selection prior to scanning, then the first document is
selected, regardless of the value of the Update Interval.

Select last document after scanning


When the documents have been scanned, selects the last document in the
batch.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 191


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 13 Configuring workstation options

13.7 Configuring Configuration Management settings


To configure Configuration Management settings:

1. Click Tools > Workstation Options.

2. In the Configure Workstation Options dialog box, click the Configuration


Management Settings tab.

3. Define the settings, and then click OK.

Selected configuration
Downloads the entered configuration.

Enable permanent selection of the configuration


Saves the selected configuration as the default configuration and displays
the Store this configuration as your default logon configuration check box
in the Select user configuration dialog box. For more information, see
“Switching between assigned configurations” on page 206.

To upload or download the configuration, see “Sharing, exporting, and


importing the configuration“ on page 199.
To select a Configuration Management, see Step 6 in “Configuring Server and
Document Pipeline settings” on page 209.

192 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 14
Defining areas for recognition

You can define groups of rectangular areas on the scanned page. You can specify if
these areas should be ignored, or if they should be the only part of the page where
the relevant operation is performed. This includes tasks such as, searching for
barcodes, patch codes, or blank pages. These area specifications are valid for all
processing subprofiles and the subprofile's elements reference the areas that you
have defined.

These settings are stored in the registry in HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\IXOS


\IXOS_ARCHIVE\6.0\Scan\HKLM. You can share, export, and import the settings.

14.1 Creating area sets


To create areas for recognition:

1. Click Tools > Areas Configuration.

2. In the Manage Area Sets dialog box, click Create, and then enter a name for the
area.

Tip: Click Copy to take over the values of an existing area set.

3. Click Configure, and then define the settings in the Configure Area Set dialog
box. For more information, see “Configuring area sets” on page 194.

4. In the Page source for configuration dialog area, define the settings, and then
click OK.

Scanned documents
Specifies if the selected page or the first page of the selected document will
be used as the source. If the document stack is empty, this option is
disabled.

Configure page size


Defines the paper size for a blank page.
Click Settings, and then select a Standard paper size or enter the
parameters for Custom paper size.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 193


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 14 Defining areas for recognition

14.2 Configuring area sets


You can define separate rectangular areas within a set.

To configure area sets:

1. Click Tools > Areas Configuration.

2. In the Manage Area Sets dialog box, click Configure.


In the Configure Area Set dialog box, the page preview displays either the
selected page in the document stack if Scanned documents has been selected in
the Page source for configuration dialog section or a blank page.
When you use the document stack as a source, you can switch between pages
and documents using Next Page, Prev Page (previous page), Next Doc, and
Prev Doc.

3. Click Add, define the size and position of the new rectangle, and then click OK.
The rectangle is shown in dotted-line frames and has handles for the frame. To
define its size and position use the mouse and select the displayed handles in
the frames or enter values directly into the list. Change size and position as
desired. In the page preview, you can see immediately whether the rectangle
has been positioned correctly.

Tips
• You can also add a new rectangle by drawing it directly on the
displayed page.
• The selected rectangle appears in the list with a different color.
• The unit of measure is set in the Tools > User Options menu.
• You can define the areas as Required or Ignored.

194 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
14.2. Configuring area sets

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 195


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 15
Changing permissions

Enterprise Scan has no internal authentication for front-end components. Instead,


Enterprise Scan uses Windows user management and does not provide special users
for front-end components. You can apply the Windows emergency user concepts if
required.

The scan user signs in to the scan host as a user of the Windows operating system. If
the user is a member of the operating system’s Administrator group, then the user
has administrator permissions and is an Administrator in the context of Enterprise
Scan. The permission levels described in the Permissions section apply to all users
logging into the scan host who are not members of the Administrator group.

The Administrator controls access to certain menu items and functions to ensure a
secure working environment for Enterprise Scan. The application is configured to
prevent a scan operator from accessing settings that must not be changed.

To change permissions:

1. Click Tools > Permissions.

2. Define the settings, and then click OK.

Configure Workstation Options


The user can change the settings in Tools > Workstation Options.

Configure Input Subprofiles


The user can create or configure Input subprofiles.
This permission is also evaluated for the Configure Scanner and Rescan
operations in the File menu. Remove this permission to prevent end users
from changing settings in the input subprofile, using the Configure
Scanner and Rescan operations.

Note: With the permission removed, the Rescan operations will


perform an immediate rescan, using the same settings as in the initial
scan. You could use this option if there was a paper jam or a similar
error in the physical scanner.

Configure Processing Subprofiles


The user can create or configure Processing subprofiles.

Configure Archiving Subprofiles


The user can create or configure Archiving subprofiles.

Configure Profile
The user can switch between existing subprofiles.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 197


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 15 Changing permissions

Without any permission


The user can switch between existing profiles.

You can share, export, and import these settings. For more information, see
“Sharing, exporting, and importing the configuration“ on page 199.
For more information, see also the OpenText Knowledge Center entry https://
knowledge.opentext.com/knowledge/llisapi.dll/Open/15806606.

198 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 16

Sharing, exporting, and importing the configuration

You can make the configuration available to other users who work with Enterprise
Scan either on this computer or elsewhere in the network. To do so, you must share,
or export and import the configuration. You also can upload and download the
configuration to and from Archive Center or Capture Center Server. The
configuration includes the following settings:

• Profiles and subprofiles


• Permissions
• Workstation options
• Areas configuration
• Keyboard shortcuts

Enterprise Scan supports different modes of Configuration Managements:

• Local configuration management (registry mode)


• Server Configuration Management

• Server mode - Archive Center


• Server mode - Capture Center Server

To select the Configuration Management:

1. Click Tools > Server and Document Pipeline Settings.

2. In the Server and Document Pipeline Settings dialog box, click the Server
Settings tab.

3. In the Select Configuration Management section, select the appropriate


Configuration Management option, and then click OK:

• Archive Center

• Capture Center Server


• Local configuration management

If you select a server mode, you must also set the server settings accordingly.

You can also define registry keys in Enterprise Scan.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 199


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 16 Sharing, exporting, and importing the configuration

S:SCANCONFIGMODE

The registry key S:SCANCONFIGMODE is located in the registry at


HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\IXOS\IXOS_ARCHIVE\6.0\Scan.

This key replaces the behavior of the CONFIGMODE key which was used in earlier
versions of Enterprise Scan.

During installation of Enterprise Scan, the installer will check for the CONFIGMODE
key. If the key is present, the installer copies the value and creates a new key
S:SCANCONFIGMODE. Afterwards, the old key CONFIGMODE is deleted. If the
CONFIGMODE key is not present, no action is taken.

The S:SCANCONFIGMODE key is used by Enterprise Scan to switch between registry


mode and server mode of Configuration Management. The key is necessary for
uploading and downloading the configuration in server mode. If it is not present,
create it in HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\IXOS\IXOS_ARCHIVE\6.0\Scan.

Set the value for the key S:SCANCONFIGMODE, as follows:


• 0 for server mode: To store the configurations on a selected server.
• 1 for registry mode (default mode): To store the configurations in the local
Windows registry.

Note: If the registry entry is missing, registry mode is used.

S:ScanConfigServer

The S:ScanConfigServer registry key is located in the registry at


HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\IXOS\OCC Server\Scan.

The ScanConfigServer key is used by Enterprise Scan in server mode to switch


between Archive Center and Capture Center Server.
• 0 for Archive Center.
• 1 for Capture Center Server.

Notes
• If the registry entry is missing Archive Center is used.
• If Configuration Management is set to registry mode this key is ignored.

Server vs. The following table shows the differences between the two modes:
registry mode

200 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Table 16-1: Behavior of the configuration in server mode and registry mode

Configuration Server mode Registry mode


Use of configurations Archive Center: Users can only work with the
Users can only work with the configurations that the
configurations that the administrator has shared through
administrator has assigned to Make Configuration Shared.
them through Archive Center.
Capture Center Server:

Users can only work with the


configurations which are
available at Capture Center
Server.
Make Configuration This menu option is disabled. Shares the configuration. The
Shared current configuration is
unchanged.
Startup of Enterprise If the administrator has If the administrator has shared the
Scan shared the configuration, the configuration, the timestamp is
scan profile is not updated compared and a message is
and no message is displayed displayed if it has been configured.
(if configured). Also the scan profile is updated if
the user so chooses. The behavior is
the same as before.
Configuration changes Any changes made to the Configuration changes are not
available for upload configuration are available for available for upload using the
using the upload using the Configuration Management tool.
Configuration Configuration Management
Management tool tool.
Exporting and These menu options are Exporting a configuration does not
importing the disabled. change the current configuration.
configuration Importing a configuration modifies
the current configuration.
Downloading The configuration is No configuration is downloaded.
configuration using downloaded and set active. The following error message is
Configuration written to the log file: “Exiting the
Management tool and application as
setting active SCANCONFIGMODE is not set as
0.”

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 201


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 16 Sharing, exporting, and importing the configuration

16.1 Working with the registry mode - local


configuration management
16.1.1 Sharing the configuration
You can make the configuration available to other users working on this computer.

When sharing a configuration, all registry settings in


HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\IXOS\IXOS_ARCHIVE\6.0\Scan\HKLM\ are copied
to
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\IXOS\IXOS_ARCHIVE\6.0\Scan\HKLM\.

To share the configuration:

• Click Tools > Make Configuration Shared.


A dialog box opens and confirms that the configuration has been marked for
sharing successfully.
The next time a user opens Enterprise Scan on this computer, the configuration
settings are updated.
You can enable the option for a notice to be displayed to the user regarding this
configuration update. For more information, see “Configuring general
workstation options” on page 188.

16.1.2 Exporting and importing the configuration


You can make the configuration available to other users by exporting the
configuration to a file share, and then importing the configuration on the other
computer.

Warning

Do not edit any configuration settings within the XML file.

To export the configuration:

1. Click Tools > Export Configuration.

2. In the Export Configuration dialog box, select the profiles you want to export or
select the All subprofiles check box.

3. In the Save As dialog box, select the destination for the XML file, and then click
OK.
The configuration from the HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\IXOS
\IXOS_ARCHIVE\6.0\Scan\HKLM\ registry key is written into this XML file.

To import the configuration:

1. Click Tools > Import Configuration.

202 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
16.2. Working with the server mode - Archive Center

2. In the Open dialog box, navigate to the previously exported XML file, and then
click Open.
3. In the Import Configuration dialog box, select the profiles you want to import,
and then click OK.
In the Import mode field, select Replace to overwrite existing profiles, or select
Add to add the profiles to the configuration.
The configuration stored in the XML file is copied to the HKEY_CURRENT_USER
\Software\IXOS\IXOS_ARCHIVE\6.0\Scan\HKLM\ registry key.

Note: The imported configuration is only valid for the user who imported
it. If you want to make the imported configuration available for all users
working on the computer, use Make Configuration Shared after the
import. For more information, see “Sharing the configuration”
on page 202.

16.2 Working with the server mode - Archive Center


You can upload and download the configuration of an Enterprise Scan client to and
from Archive Center. The configuration includes all the settings Enterprise Scan is
currently using, as reflected in the registry under HKCU\SOFTWARES\IXOS
\IXOS_ARCHIVE\6.0\SCAN\HKLM.

To upload the configuration, you must configure the settings inside Enterprise Scan
and then upload the configuration to an Archive Center user group.

Notes
• If you are using Enterprise Scan 9.7 you do not need to migrate
configurations because Enterprise Scan 10.0 and higher supports Enterprise
Scan 9.7 configurations.
• If you are using Enterprise Scan 10.0 and higher you cannot load
configurations onto systems using Enterprise Scan 9.7. The Configuration
Management tool uploads configurations to a new container in Archive
Center.
• If you are using Enterprise Scan 10.0 not all configurations work on systems
using Enterprise Scan 10.5. The Configuration Management tool uploads
configurations to a new container in Archive Center.
• To use the Configuration Management tool, you must set the Configuration
Management to server mode in the Server and Document Pipeline Settings
dialog box. For more information, see “Sharing, exporting, and importing
the configuration“ on page 199. This sets the S:SCANCONFIGMODE registry key
to server mode.

To start the Configuration Management tool:

• Click Start > All Programs > OpenText > Enterprise Scan Configuration
Management.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 203


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 16 Sharing, exporting, and importing the configuration

Notes
• Enterprise Scan Configuration Management implicitly starts the
Configuration Management tool that corresponds to your server mode
selection.
• You must have administrator privileges to start the Configuration
Management tool. Without administrator privileges you get an error
message that states that you do not have enough permissions to use this
tool.

You can start the Configuration Management tool that corresponds to the currently
selected configuration server using ConfigurationDownload.exe. This forces
profiles to be downloaded from the configured configuration management server
without taking any time stamp into account.

To start a preselected Configuration Management tool:

• Open Command Prompt, and then type ConfigurationDownload.exe -f.

16.3 Working with the server mode - Capture Center


Server
You can upload and download the configuration of an Enterprise Scan client to and
from Capture Center Server. The configuration includes all the settings Enterprise
Scan is currently using, as reflected in the registry under HKCU\SOFTWARES\IXOS
\IXOS_ARCHIVE\6.0\SCAN\HKLM.

To upload the configuration, you must configure the settings inside Enterprise Scan
and then upload the configuration to a Capture Center Server.

Note: To use the Configuration Management tool, Configuration Management


must be set to server mode in the Server and Document Pipeline Settings
dialog box. For more information, see “Sharing, exporting, and importing the
configuration“ on page 199. This sets the S:SCANCONFIGMODE registry key to
server mode.

To start the Configuration Management tool:

• Click Start > All Programs > OpenText > Enterprise Scan Configuration
Management.

Notes
• Enterprise Scan Configuration Management implicitly starts the
Configuration Management tool that corresponds to your server mode
selection.
• You must have administrator privileges to start the Configuration
Management tool. Without administrator privileges you get an error

204 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
16.4. Uploading and downloading Enterprise Scan configurations

message that states that you do not have enough permissions to use this
tool.

You can start the Configuration Management tool that corresponds to the currently
selected configuration server using ConfigurationDownload.exe. This forces
profiles to be downloaded from the configured configuration management server
without taking any time stamp into account.

To start a preselected Configuration Management tool:

• Open Command Prompt, and then type ConfigurationDownload.exe -f.

16.4 Uploading and downloading Enterprise Scan


configurations
You can upload and download the configuration to Archive Center or Capture
Center Server depending on the settings in the Server and Document Pipeline
settings. For more information, see “Configuring Server and Document Pipeline
settings” on page 209.

To upload the active configuration to Archive Center:

1. Start Enterprise Scan and configure the application according to your needs.

2. Open Configuration Management. For more information, see “To start the
Configuration Management tool:“ on page 203.
The Active configuration line displays the currently active configuration.

3. To upload the current configuration to Archive Center, click Upload.


The configuration will be uploaded to Archive Center to a user group.

4. In the User Authentication dialog box, enter a name for the configuration in the
User Group field, the User Name and the corresponding Password of the super
user in Administration Server, and then click OK.
The configuration is uploaded to Archive Center and appears in the User
Groups for current version on <ADMS name> list.

To upload the active configuration to Capture Center Server:

1. Start Enterprise Scan and configure the application according to your needs.
This current configuration will be uploaded to Capture Center Server during
the next steps.

2. Open Configuration Management. For more information, see “To start the
Configuration Management tool:“ on page 203.
The Active configuration line still displays the last downloaded configuration.

3. Enter a new configuration name or select the configuration you want to upload
to the Capture Center Server, click Upload, and then confirm the messages.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 205


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 16 Sharing, exporting, and importing the configuration

To download a configuration from Archive Center:

1. Open Configuration Management. For more information, see “To start the
Configuration Management tool:“ on page 203.

2. Select the configuration you want to download from the User Groups for
current version on <ADMS name> list.

Tip: To update the list, click Refresh.

3. Click Download and confirm the message.


The downloaded configuration is now the active configuration, as displayed in
the Active configuration line.

To download a configuration from Capture Center Server:

1. Open Configuration Management. For more information, see “To start the
Configuration Management tool:“ on page 203.

2. Select the configuration you want to download from the Availaible


configurations list.

Tip: To update the list, click Refresh.

3. Click Download and confirm the messages.


The Active configuration line displays the currently active configuration.

16.4.1 Switching between assigned configurations


If there is more than one configuration mapped to the current user, the user can
switch between those configurations, using ConfigurationDownload.exe.

Notes
• ConfigurationDownload.exe implicitly starts the download tool that
corresponds to your server mode selection.
• After installing Enterprise Scan, this tool starts automatically whenever the
user signs in to the system.
• Admin users can also use Download in the Configuration Management tool
to switch between configurations.
• The configuration will be downloaded only if the timestamp differs.

To switch between configurations:

1. Run ConfigurationDownload.exe, which is available at <Open Text


installation directory>\bin.
Dialog displayed in the Archive Center server mode:

206 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
16.4. Uploading and downloading Enterprise Scan configurations

Dialog displayed in the Capture Center server mode:

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 207


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 16 Sharing, exporting, and importing the configuration

2. Select the configuration you want to make the active configuration, and then
click OK.

3. Optional If you want Enterprise Scan to load the selected configuration every time
you sign in, select the Store this configuration as your default logon
configuration check box.

Tip: If the Store this configuration as your default logon configuration


check box is not displayed, see “Configuring Configuration Management
settings” on page 192.

208 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 17
Defining archiving settings

To enable your Archiving profile, you have to define some settings for the leading
applications.

17.1 Configuring Server and Document Pipeline


settings
If you archive your documents using the Document Pipeline, you can change the
settings for Archive Center, Capture Center Server, and the Document Pipeline.
These settings are defined initially during installation.

To configure Server and Document Pipeline settings:

1. Click Tools > Server and Document Pipeline Settings.

2. In the Server and Document Pipeline settings dialog box, click the Server
Settings tab.

3. In the Archive Center area, define the Server name of Archive Center on which
the archive modes are defined, Protocol, and the Port number.

Notes
• The default port number is 8080.
• When you change the Server name or the Port number, you must
restart Enterprise Scan to update the archive modes.
• When Configuration Management is set to Archive Center this server is
also used for Configuration Management.

In case you are changing the Archive Center settings, click Use the above
settings for local Document Pipeline configuration. For more information, see
“Changing the Archive Center settings” on page 211.

4. In the Capture Center Server area if Configuration Management is set to


Capture Center Server, define the Server name of Capture Center Server,
Protocol, and the Port number.

5. Select the Off-line mode check box if you want to enable off-line mode. When it
is enabled, neither connection to the server nor archiving using the Document
Pipeline is possible.

6. In the Select Configuration Management area, select the Configuration


Management. For more information, see “Configuring Configuration
Management settings” on page 192.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 209


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 17 Defining archiving settings

7. In the Server and Document Pipeline settings dialog box, click the Document
Pipeline Configuration tab.

8. Select the Use local Document Pipeline or Use remote Document Pipeline
check box, enter the respective parameters, and then click OK. The default
values are shown in the particular fields. For more information, see
“Configuring remote Document Pipelines” on page 174.

Notes
• The remote pipeline interface is supported by the Document Pipeline for
Content Server version 9.7 and higher. To use the remote interface for
the Document Pipeline for Content Server, install Document Pipeline
Remote Interface and Core Services on the host where you want to run
the Document Pipeline for Content Server. Those additional
components are bundled inside the master setup for Document Pipeline
for Content Server. For more information, see OpenText Imaging
Enterprise Scan - Installation Guide (CLES-IGD).
• The parameters for the Document Pipeline target are globally
applicable. They are used when releasing documents to Document
Pipeline for Content Server or OpenText Document Pipeline for SAP®
Solutions.

If your archiving configuration for OpenText Document Pipeline for SAP®


Solutions includes an archive mode stored on OpenText Administration Client,
the Document Pipeline target configured for this particular archive mode takes
precedence:

Use local Document Pipeline


If a local Document Pipeline is configured in the archive mode, the
Document Pipeline target as specified in the local configuration of
Enterprise Scan will take preference. This local configuration may target
either a local Document Pipeline or a remote Document Pipeline.

Use remote Document Pipeline


If a remote Document Pipeline is explicitly configured in the archive mode,
the specified Document Pipeline target will be used. The Document Pipeline
target that is configured in Enterprise Scan will be ignored.

210 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
17.2. Defining the sign in to TCP

17.1.1 Changing the Archive Center settings


The Archive Center parameters are stored in the Enterprise Scan and Document
Pipeline configuration. Enterprise Scan uses the registry at HKLM, and Document
Pipelines use the COMMON.Setup file at %ProgramData%. After changing the Archive
Center parameters, both independent software components must be updated.

To change the Archive Center settings:

1. Perform step 1 to 3 in “To configure Server and Document Pipeline settings:“.


2. Select Use the above settings for local Document Pipeline configuration, and
then click OK.

Tip: If you do not use a local Document Pipeline the function is


unavailable.

3. In the Archive Center used for local Document Pipeline dialog box, verify the
changes, and then click OK.
The Spawner service is stopped and restarted to activate the changes.

Tips
• By clearing the check boxes you can exlude individual parameters from
being written to the Document Pipeline configuration.
• Use the tooltip functionality of the information icon to view the current
parameter used by the local Document Pipeline. It is shown only in
case the current parameter differs from the new one.
• In certain scenarios you may want to use a Notification Server that is
running on a different host than Archive Center. To retain the currently
configured Notification Server make sure to clear those two
parameters.

17.2 Defining the sign in to TCP


To define the sign in to TCP:

1. Click Tools > TCP Sign in.

2. In the OpenText Transactional Content Processing Sign in dialog box, enter


the Sign in information and the Server information.

3. Click Sign in to test the connection to TCP.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 211


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 17 Defining archiving settings

17.3 Defining the sign in to Content Server


To define the sign in to Content Server:

1. Click Tools > Content Server Sign In.

2. In the OpenText Content Server Sign In dialog box, enter the sign in
information on the Sign In tab.

Tips
• The name of Content Server is defined initially during installation.
• For a RPC connection, enter port 2099 (see Direct sign in on the
Options tab).
• For a HTTP connection, enter port 80 (see URL sign in on the Options
tab).
• For a HTTPS connection, enter port 443 (see URL sign in on the
Options tab).

3. Click the Options tab, and then select the connection to Content Server:

Direct sign in
If the connection to Content Server is established using RPC, select the
Direct sign in check box.

URL sign in
If the connection to Content Server is established using HTTP or HTTPS,
select the URL sign in check box.

URL
Enter the Content Server sign in URL into the URL field, for example
https:\\bngimg-w2k301\livelink\livelink.exe.

Use SSL
If you want to use a HTTPS connection between Enterprise Scan and
Content Server, select the Use SSL check box.

Note: Install the Trusted Root Certification Authorities


using the web browser.

Check server certificate


Do not select the Check server certificate check box. This function
could be used for server certificates issued by public entrusted
Certificate Authorities but this is not supported in this version.

HTTP user login


If you want to connect to Content Server hosted in Internet Information
Services (IIS) with basic authentication enabled, enter the HTTP user
login information.

212 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
17.3. Defining the sign in to Content Server

Use Windows credentials


If you want to use the Microsoft Windows sign in for the connection,
select the Use Windows credentials check box.

4. Click the RM tab if you use the import Records Management attributes feature. For
more information, see “Importing Records Management attributes”
on page 138.

a. To enable the import of Records Management attributes, select the Use


Records Management service check box.
b. Enter the WebService Urls (end points) for Authentication and Records
Management.
For retrieving the details of Records Management related functionality,
Content Server communicates using the web service. The Records
Management web service must be installed and configured properly in the
web server, for example Internet Information Services (IIS) or Apache
Tomcat.
When you enter the server name in the Sign In tab, the fields in the
Records Management tab are automatically filled with the default values:

Authentication (default URL path)


http://<server name>/les-services/Authentication.svc?wsdl

RecordsManagement (default URL path)


http://<server name>/les-services-
recordsmanagement/RecordsManagement.svc?wsdl

5. Click Sign In to establish the connection to Content Server.

17.3.1 Using Impersonate or Anonymous Submission for


Document Pipeline for Content Server
When a user initiates archiving using Document Pipeline for Content Server, the
credentials given by the user during the Content Server sign in are used to create the
documents in Content Server. This behavior is called impersonate submission. If the
user signs in without administrator privileges, they are only entitled to archive to
their Personal Workspace in Content Server. When signed in with administrator
privileges, the user is also entitled to archive to the Enterprise Workspace in Content
Server.

Impersonate submission is the default setting. However, you can configure an


anonymous submission to Content Server. Anonymous submission means that the
default user (Admin) is used to create the documents in Content Server when
archiving using the Document Pipeline for Content Server. This setting allows the
user to archive to the Enterprise Workspace Content Server even if they are not
signed in with administrator privileges.

Note: If you are using the anonymous submission script in Set Document
Pipeline Attributes, do not archive into the Personal Workspace in Content

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 213


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 17 Defining archiving settings

Server because, as Admin user, you do not have the permission to write to your
Personal Workspace in Content Server.

Technical Technically, we use the “administrative account” to create objects like folders,
background documents or workflow instances in Content Server. That administrative account
does not need to be the admin, it might be any other account that is granted
sysadmin rights on Content Server. This account is used to create the object followed
by another call that actually impersonates the user that is actually triggering the
release operation from Enterprise Scan. This design pattern allows Document
Pipeline to maintain the connection to Content Server avoiding the handshake
negotiation and session initialization every time a document is released. The
impersonate call then makes sure that the document gets the right owner in Content
Server without terminating existing session and building new connection for
different user. Document Pipeline can process a queue of document originating from
different scanning station and released by differential users.

You can configure anonymous submission on Global and Profile level.

To configure anonymous submission for all documents archived using the


Document Pipeline for Content Server:

• Add the following line to the Document Pipeline for Content Server
configuration file DT_DOCTOLES.Setup:

IGNOREDTCREDENTIALS=true

The DT_DOCTOLES.Setup file is available at C:\ProgramData\OpenText\BASE


Document Pipeline\config\setup\DT.DOCTOLES.setup.

Notes
• When you perform changes to the DT_DOCTOLES.Setup file, stop and
then restart the Spawner service to activate the changes.
• You must type IGNOREDTCREDENTIALS in upper case.

To configure anonymous submission for certain profiles:

• Add a script like the following example to Set Document Pipeline Attributes:

Document.COMMANDS += "\n";
Document.COMMANDS += "IGNOREDTCREDENTIALS true\n";

Configuring anonymous submission on profile level overrides the setting in the


DT_DOCTOLES.Setup file.
For more information, see “Defining Document Pipeline attributes”
on page 162.

214 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
17.4. Defining the sign in to SAP

17.4 Defining the sign in to SAP


Notes
• .NET Connector 3.0 is used to connect Enterprise Scan to a SAP system or
SAP solution and must be installed on the client computer. For more
information, see “Installing SAP .NET Connector to connect to a SAP system
or SAP solution” on page 215.
• If you are working with scripts you must configure the old scripts to be
compatible with the latest SAP .NET Connector. For more information, see
the Indexing and Scripting Guide in OpenText Developer Network (OTDN)
(https://knowledge.opentext.com/go/EnterpriseScan_OTDN). You can find
the Indexing for the SAP system using SAP Nco 3.0 scripting example in the The
Interactive Phase Examples section.

To define the sign in to SAP:

1. Click Tools > SAP Sign in.


2. In the SAP Sign In dialog box, enter the User Information and the Connection
Details.
3. Click Sign In to test the connection to the SAP system.

17.4.1 Installing SAP .NET Connector to connect to a SAP


system or SAP solution
Note: Each user accessing application functionality through the SAP .NET
Connector is required to be licensed under a respective solution or component
license.

If you have existing developer licenses these named persons already have the
required license to develop solutions based on the SAP .NET Connector. If
additional persons want to develop based on the SAP .NET Connector, you
will have to acquire additional developers licenses for them.

To install SAP .NET Connector:

1. Download the SAP .NET Connector from the SAP Service Marketplace under
https://websmp101.sap-ag.de/CONNECTORS with your SAP Service
Marketplace user name and password.
2. Run the SAP .NET Connector installation directly from the msi file.
3. In the Welcome dialog box, click Next.
4. In the Select Installation Folder dialog box, do the following:

a. To change the installation folder, click Browse.


b. To check how much disk space is required for installation, click Disk
Space.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 215


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 17 Defining archiving settings

c. To install SAP .NET Connector for yourself, or for anyone, click Exeryone
or Just me.

d. Click Next.

5. In the Optional setup steps dialog box, select Install assemblies to GAC, and
then click Next.

6. In the Confirm Installation dialog box, click Next.

7. In the Installation Complet dialog box, click Close.

17.5 Configuring archiving from the leading


application
Archiving of the documents in Enterprise Scan can be initiated from the leading
application.

To configure archiving from the leading application:

1. Click Tools > Archiving from Leading Application.

2. In the Configure Archiving from Leading Application dialog box, define the
settings, and then OK.

• Enter the Archive Center name connected to Enterprise Scan. For more
information, see “Configuring Server and Document Pipeline settings”
on page 209.

• In the Start Archiving from area, specify which document is archived first
when archiving is started from the leading application.
If you select First selected document, which is the default value, make sure
the correct document is selected in the document stack before you start
archiving.

• In the Options area, select Remove deleted pages to remove pages that are
marked as deleted.

• In the Note format field, enter placeholders for the notes. For more
information, see “Working with placeholders for notes“ on page 269.

• In the Default note field, enter a default note for each document. The notes
are attached to the archived document. For more information, see “Working
with placeholders for notes“ on page 269.

• Click Advanced.
In the Advanced Settings dialog box, adjust the output file format as
described in “Defining advanced settings for archiving” on page 179.

216 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 18
Monitoring archiving through Document Pipeline

Enterprise Scan uses Document Pipelines in many archiving scenarios to process


documents to be archived on Archive Center. The Document Pipelines require
regular monitoring to make sure that all scanned documents have been processed
and sent to Archive Center.

The Document Pipelines running on the Enterprise Scan workstation or on a


dedicated computer are similar to the one running on an Archive Center. Therefore,
they can be monitored using the same tools: OpenText Archive Monitoring Web
Client (Archive Monitoring Web Client) and OpenText Document Pipeline Info
(Document Pipeline Info). Refer to the Archive Monitoring Web Client and
Document Pipeline Info online help for detailed information on these tools.

Note: The Archive Monitoring Web Client requires that the Monitor Server be
running on the computer running the Document Pipelines.

If anything should interrupt the archiving process after the document information is
sent to the leading application but before the document is transferred to the archive,
the document will be known to the leading application, but it will not be retrievable
or viewable. The document is still in the Document Pipeline. Use Document Pipeline
Info to restart processing. For more information, see OpenText Document Pipelines -
Overview and Import Interfaces (AR-CDP).

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 217


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 19
Backing up data

The document stack and External Storage repositories used by Enterprise Scan as well
as the Document Pipeline directories may require a backup of their data in certain
cases.

19.1 Backing up the document stack


All documents displayed in Enterprise Scan are temporarily stored in a document
stack on the file system before they are archived. There is one document stack per
user; it is created during the initial startup of Enterprise Scan.

If a large number of documents that have not yet been archived remain in the
document stacks, OpenText recommends that you back up these document stacks
between working sessions to avoid rescanning and reprocessing the documents in
case of a problem.

Document stacks are user-dependent and are stored in the file system in the
following directories:

Windows XP: - %USERPROFILE%\Local Settings\Application Data\OpenText


\Enterprise Scan\StorageV1

For example:
%SystemDrive%\Documents and Settings\<user name>\Local Settings
\Application Data\OpenText\EnterpriseScan\StorageV1

Windows 7: - %USERPROFILE%\AppData\Local\OpenText\Enterprise Scan


\StorageV1

Note: By default, the Application Data directory is not visible in Windows


Explorer because it is a hidden directory. To make it visible, click Tools >
Folder Options in the Windows Explorer menu, then click the View tab and
enable the option Show hidden files and folders.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 219


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 19 Backing up data

19.2 Backing up the Document Pipeline directory


Document Export - Document Pipeline scenarios use the Document Pipeline directory of
OpenText Document Pipeline. In a normal operating state, scanned documents
remain only temporarily in the Document Pipeline before they are sent to Archive
Center. In this case, no action is necessary except regular monitoring of the
Document Pipeline. For more information, see “Monitoring archiving through
Document Pipeline“ on page 217.

If a large number of documents get stuck in the Document Pipeline, OpenText


recommends that you back up these documents to avoid losing data before you
address the problem. To find the location of the Document Pipeline directory
(DPDIR) on the Document Pipeline host computer, click Tools > Server and
Document Pipeline Settings.

19.3 Backing up external storage repositories


External Storage scenarios use External Storage repositories (file system directories). In
some scenarios, scanned documents are temporarily stored in these repositories
before being processed further on the same or other Enterprise Scan workstations.

If a large number of scanned documents are stored in the external storage


repositories, OpenText recommends that you back up these repositories regularly to
avoid having to rescan and reprocess the documents in case of a problem.

The external storage repositories are configured in the Enterprise Scan Archiving
subprofiles. The directory path name is the value of the Directory field. For more
information, see “Archiving to external storage” on page 178.

220 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 20

Troubleshooting

20.1 General recommendation


This chapter provides an introduction to troubleshooting and error analysis. It
presents tools and methods that can help you find the cause of a problem.

• Back up the Enterprise Scan data regularly. For more information, see “Backing
up external storage repositories” on page 220.
• Monitor Enterprise Scan workstations and Document Pipeline hosts regularly
with Archive Monitoring Web Client and Microsoft Event Viewer. You can use
these tools remotely or locally. For more information, see “Monitoring archiving
through Document Pipeline“ on page 217, and “Troubleshooting Document
Pipelines for Enterprise Scan“ on page 229.
• Verify that all documents passing through the Enterprise Scan Document
Pipelines have been correctly processed and archived. Use Document Pipeline
Info to check the status of the different DocTools and archiving queues. For more
information, see “Monitoring archiving through Document Pipeline“
on page 217.
• Make sure that there is enough free space available for Enterprise Scan data
(document stacks, Document Pipeline directory, external storage repositories)
and for log files.
• Install the relevant patches.
• Follow the upgrade strategy for OpenText Imaging and other system
components. For more information, see Support Lifecycle (https://
knowledge.opentext.com/knowledge/llisapi.dll/Open/LifeCycle).
• Train administrators, operators and end-users.
• Follow the recommendations published in Release Notes and newsletters.
Release Notes are regularly updated in Knowledge Center.
• Perform regular maintenance on your hardware.

For advanced troubleshooting, use the Knowledge Center. You can either browse
Knowledge Center folders from the home page (https://knowledge.opentext.com/)
or use the search capabilities of the Knowledge Center.

Note: The content of the Knowledge Center entries is updated by OpenText


Customer Support independently of the content of this documentation. Check
that the information in the Knowledge Center entries corresponds to the
version of the OpenText products you use.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 221


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 20 Troubleshooting

Imaging Solutions Knowledge Base in the Knowledge Center

For more information, see https://knowledge.opentext.com/knowledge/llisapi.dll/


open/15783397. From this site, you can perform a search request.

Useful Knowledge Center entries

For example: Which ports are used by the archive components? (https://
knowledge.opentext.com/knowledge/llisapi.dll/open/15529922)

20.2 Troubleshooting Enterprise Scan


All OpenText Imaging Clients log information in log files. This information can be
used by the administrator to solve problems or can be sent to other administrators.
These log files are also used by OpenText Customer Support for advanced
troubleshooting. Different log files are written, depending on the clients and the
scenario in use.

Parts of the logging information are also displayed in the Imaging Clients Message
Box. For more information, see log messages on page 226.

20.2.1 Error messages and Imaging Clients Message Box


The Windows clients of OpenText Imaging display log messages in case of an error.
The log messages are displayed in the language selected for the Imaging Clients.

Log messages are displayed chronologically, with the most recent at the top. The
maximum number of messages to be kept in the error message stack is 100 by
default. Only servere log messages are displayed, for example Fatal, Error,
Warning, and Note.

Trace messages are not displayed. The difference between log messages and trace
messages is explained in “Logging and tracing” on page 226.

To view log messages:

• In the log message, click Details.

Messages
Log messages contain three types of information, displayed in two columns:

Severity
Severity classes, Fatal, Error, Warning, and Note, correspond to log
message categories, FATAL, ERROR, WARNING, and IMPNOTE.
The number in brackets after the log severity class is the identifier of the
log message.

Message Text
Text of the log message, displayed in the language selected for the
Imaging Clients.

222 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
20.2. Troubleshooting Enterprise Scan

Show
You can filter the log messages to be displayed. By default, all buttons are
selected, which means that all classes of log messages are displayed.
If you disable a button, the messages of the corresponding severity class
will be removed from the message window.

Clear messages on dialog end


This option is activated by default. When the Imaging Clients Message Box
is displayed the next time, it will display only newly logged messages. If
disabled, previous log messages will be shown along with new ones.

Send logfile to
You can send the IXClient.log file to different applications or to mail
recipients. Click Send logfile to to select your destination.

Note: Be aware that the content of the log file itself is sent, not the
contents of the error message stack.

The registry entry for maximum number of messages is


HKCU\SOFTWARE\IXOS\IXOS_ARCHIVE\CWin\DeMoS\MaxSizeOfMsgStack.

Note: If the value of MaxSizeOfMsgStack is set to 0, the Imaging Clients


Message Box will not appear in case of an error.

20.2.2 Logging Enterprise Scan usage statistics


Enterprise Scan can generate a statistics file in XML format which can be analyzed or
processed by custom tools. The following data are logged in the statistics file:
• domain name
• host name
• user name
• start date and time
• end date and time
• number of scanned pages
• number of deleted pages
• number of archived pages
• amount of archived KB

The statistics file is updated every 30 minutes, and also during application
shutdown.

The statistics file is by default located in:

Windows 7: - %USERPROFILE%\AppData\Local\OpenText\Enterprise Scan


\Reporting.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 223


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 20 Troubleshooting

You can override the default file path manually in the registry:
HKEY_CURRENT_USER\SOFTWARE\IXOS\IXOS_ARCHIVE\6.0\Scan\HKLM
\CustomSettings\S:StatisticsPath

The statistics file name is Statistics_ScanClient_YYYY.xml, for example


Statistics_ScanClient_2015.xml for the year 2015.

To activate the statistics file generation:

1. Click Tools > Workstation Options.


2. In the Configure Workstation Options dialog box, click the General tab, and
then click Log Usage Statistics.
3. Click OK.
4. Restart Enterprise Scan to start the statistics file generation.

20.2.3 Logging archiving operations


Each document that passes through the archiving phase creates a dedicated record.
Enterprise Scan can generate a file in an internal format to view these archive jobs
(all operations are logged) and archived documents (document specific attributes are
logged), for example to verify the number of archived pages. The following data are
logged in the file:
• Job date (time stamp of the archiving operation)
• Number of archived documents and pages
• Storage type (export module, that is used in the archiving profile)
• User name
• Host name
• Document index
• Group, batch, and folder attributes
• Target (currently not used)

Every month a new file is generated.

The file is by default located in:

Windows 7, Windows 8.1 and Windows 10: - %LOCALAPPDATA%\OpenText


\Enterprise Scan\Reporting

You can override the default file path manually in the registry:
HKEY_CURRENT_USER\SOFTWARE\IXOS\IXOS_ARCHIVE\6.0\Scan\HKLM
\CustomSettings\S:StatisticsPath

Note: If you change the file path consider that the statistics file of “Logging
Enterprise Scan usage statistics” are also redirected here.

224 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
20.2. Troubleshooting Enterprise Scan

The file name is ArchiveLog1_YYYY-MM.dat, for example


ArchiveLog1_2016-04.dat for April 2016.

To view older statistics files:

1. Click Tools > Show Archive Log.

2. In the dialog box, click File > Open older logs.

3. Navigate to the folder where the statistics files are located, select a file, and then
click Open.

To view archive jobs or archived documents:

1. Click Tools > Show Archive Log.

2. In the dialog box, click Archive Jobs or Archived Documents.

3. To view job details, select the job, and then click Open Job Details or double-
click.

To save the archive jobs or archived documents as a CSV file for further
processing:

1. Click Tools > Show Archive Log.

2. In the dialog box, click Archive Jobs or Archived Documents, and then click
File > Save as.

3. In the Save As dialog box, navigate to the folder where you want to save the
file, enter a file name, and then click Save.

20.2.4 Enterprise Scan log files


On every Enterprise Scan workstation, log files are generated that contain the log
messages and trace messages. They use the same log files IXClient.<ext> and the
same settings for logging.

You can find the log files here:

Microsoft Windows 7
%USERPROFILE%\AppData\Local\OpenText\Enterprise Scan\Log

Note: The AppData directory is hidden by default. Change the Microsoft


Windows settings to show it.

Microsoft Windows 10
%LOCALAPPDATA%\OpenText\EnterpriseScan\Log

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 225


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 20 Troubleshooting

20.2.4.1 Setting log levels


You can change the log level statically or dynamically.
• To change the log level through a registry editor is static. This means that the
new log level takes effect after Enterprise Scan is restarted. You can change the
values in the registry. For more information, see “Log file settings” on page 226.
• To change the log level through the client's GUI is dynamic and takes effect
immediately.
Within Enterprise Scan, you can use the Log level setting in the Tools > User
Options menu for that purpose. For more information, see “Configuring user
options” on page 52.

Note: Do not forget to reset the log levels after troubleshooting to avoid
generating unnecessarily large log files.

Logging and The distinction between log messages and trace messages is as follows:
tracing
Log messages
Log messages are log records written to the log files and also shown to the user
in the Imaging Clients Message Box. The log messages are written in the log files
in English but are displayed in the Imaging Clients Message Box in the language
selected for Enterprise Scan. These log messages are identified by identifiers.
Trace messages
Trace messages are trace records written to the log files only. They are in English
and are used for advanced troubleshooting.

Log levels The available log levels are:

Normal (4) = Logging


Log messages of categories FATAL, ERROR, WARNING, and IMPNOTE are logged.
This is the default log level value.
Extended (7) = Tracing
In addition to the log messages, the trace messages of categories USER, INFO, and
DEBUG are logged.

20.2.4.2 Log file settings


Log and tracing messages are written to log files named IXClient.log,
IXClient.001, IXClient.002, and so on. You can change the location of the log
files, their number and their size.

To change log file settings:

• You can use the following:

Registry editor
The setting LogSeverity is stored in <Registry_branch>\Software\IXOS
\IXOS_ARCHIVE\CommonClientSettings.

226 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
20.2. Troubleshooting Enterprise Scan

All other settings are stored in <Registry_branch>\Software\IXOS


\IXOS_ARCHIVE\CWin\DeMoS.
These settings cannot be seen in the registry before they have been set. By
default, predefined, hardcoded values are used. The settings may be user-
specific or user-independent. User-specific settings have priority over user-
independent settings.

User-specific settings
These settings are located in the registry branch HKEY_CURRENT_USER
(HKCU).

User-independent settings
These settings are located in the registry branch HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE
(HKLM).

The following settings can be used:

Log level
Registry entry: LogSeverity
The logging has two levels: 4 (normal) and 7 (extended). 4 is the default log
level, 7 is used for troubleshooting. For more information, see “Setting log
levels” on page 226.

Location of the log file


Registry entry: LogPath
Default value:

Microsoft Windows 7
%USERPROFILE%\AppData\Local\OpenText\Enterprise Scan\Log

Note: The AppData directory is hidden by default. Change the


Microsoft Windows settings to show it.

Microsoft Windows 10
%LOCALAPPDATA%\OpenText\EnterpriseScan\Log

Size of the log files in KB


Registry entry: MaxSizeOfLogFile
Default value: 6144 (KB)

Number of copies to keep


Registry entry: MaxCopiesOfLogFile
Default value: 2

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 227


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 21
Troubleshooting Document Pipelines for Enterprise
Scan

In the same way as on an Archive Center, the different DocTools and processes used
by the Document Pipeline are started by the Spawner, which runs as a service on
Microsoft Windows platforms. They can be queried and controlled using the
spawncmd utility. Commands and capabilities of the utility are described in
“Working with the spawncmd utility” on page 229.

The Spawner, the DocTools, and other processes used by the Document Pipeline log
information in log files. For more information, see “Spawner and Document Pipeline
log files” on page 233.

21.1 Restarting Document Pipeline


There may be problems that cannot be identified with the tools and methods
mentioned in this chapter. In such cases, it is often helpful to restart the Document
Pipeline.

To restart the Document Pipeline and all its DocTools and processes, stop, and then
restart the Spawner service. For information on performing this action using a
Command Prompt, see “Stopping and starting the Spawner” on page 232.

You can also use the Microsoft Windows functionality to restart the Spawner. For
more information, see the Microsoft Windows documentation.

Once the Document Pipeline has been restarted, check the status of the different
DocTools and processes using the spawncmd utility (for more information, see
“Status of DocTools and processes” on page 230), or by reading the spawner.log
file (for more information, see “Spawner and Document Pipeline log files”
on page 233).

21.2 Working with the spawncmd utility


With the spawncmd utility, you can query the status of individual DocTools and
processes and control them. You can also restart individual DocTools and processes.
This can be useful when you are performing diagnostic analysis.

The spawncmd utility is automatically installed when you install a Document


Pipeline. For more information, see OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan - Installation
Guide (CLES-IGD).

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 229


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 21 Troubleshooting Document Pipelines for Enterprise Scan

21.2.1 Using the spawncmd utility


The spawncmd utility can be used for monitoring and administrating local or remote
Document Pipelines.

Local DP To connect to the local Document Pipeline, use the following command:
spawncmd <command>
(for example spawncmd status)

Remote DP To connect to a remote Document Pipeline, use one of the following commands:
spawncmd -h <Document Pipeline_host_name> <command>
(for example spawncmd -h scan02 status, spawncmd -h scan02.ixos.de status)
or
spawncmd -h <Document Pipeline_IP_address> <command>
(for example spawncmd -h 207.46.230.219 status)

Note: The Spawner must be running on the Document Pipeline computer in


order to use the spawncmd utility.

List of To display the list of all spawncmd commands, enter spawncmd at the Command
commands Prompt:

D:\>spawncmd

usage: spawncmd [-h host] <cmd> # cmd is one of:


exit # stop all services, exit spawner
reread # reread servtab files
start <service> # start service
startall # start all services
status # read status of all services
stop <service> # stop service
kill <service> # kill service
stopall # stop all services

21.2.2 Status of DocTools and processes


To display a list of single DocTools and processes and their status, enter the
command at the Command Prompt:
spawncmd status
or
spawncmd -h <Document Pipeline_host_name> status

The following are output samples for different Document Pipelines for Enterprise
Scan.

Document Pipeline for Livelink ECM – Suite for SAP Solutions (Enterprise Scan
component only)
program-id sta pid start time stop time
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
cfbx R 2416 11/12/2015 16:47:06
docrm R 2424 11/12/2015 16:47:06
doctods_1 R 2432 11/12/2015 16:47:06
doctods_2 R 2440 11/12/2015 16:47:06

230 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
21.2. Working with the spawncmd utility

doctods_3 R 2448 11/12/2015 16:47:06


dp R 2408 11/12/2015 16:47:05
stockist T 0 11/12/2015 16:47:06 11/12/2015 16:47:08

Document Pipeline for OpenText Enterprise Process Services (Enterprise Scan


component only)
program-id sta pid start time stop time
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
docrm R 2224 11/19/2015 17:20:55
doctods_1 R 3148 11/19/2015 17:20:55
doctods_2 R 1112 11/19/2015 17:20:55
doctods_3 R 3864 11/19/2015 17:20:55
dp R 1624 11/19/2015 17:20:54
pmsdt R 2408 11/19/2015 17:20:55
stockist T 0 11/19/2015 17:20:55 11/19/2015 17:20:56

Output results The following are the descriptions of the different values for each column.

program-id
The DocTool or process name, for example, docrm.

sta
The DocTool or process status:
• R means that the process is running. Most DocTools and processes should
have this status.
• T means the process has been terminated. Only a few DocTools or processes
should have this status.
• S means the process is starting and initializing. This happens when you start
the Spawner. After a while, the status should change to R (running). Check
this by reprocessing the spwncmd status command.

Note: The correct status for each DocTool and process can be found in
“Status of DocTools and processes” on page 230. Be aware that the dp
process will have the S status for a long time if there are a lot of documents
in the Document Pipeline.
If the status of a DocTool or process is incorrect, look at the corresponding
log file and at the Spawner log file. For details about log files, see
“Spawner and Document Pipeline log files” on page 233.

pid
The DocTool or process program ID.

start time
Time when the DocTool or process started.

stop time
Time when the DocTool or process stopped.

About Consider the following points when determining which monitoring tool to use:
monitoring tools
• The information provided by the spawncmd status command is similar to that
displayed by the Archive Monitoring Web Client. For more information, see

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 231


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 21 Troubleshooting Document Pipelines for Enterprise Scan

“Monitoring archiving through Document Pipeline“ on page 217. However, the


Archive Monitoring Web Client provides information on the DocTools only, not
on the other Document Pipeline processes. On the other hand, the Archive
Monitoring Web Client provides additional information, such as the amount of
free log disk space, and detailed information about the objects being monitored,
such as detailed DocTool status, number of documents in input and error queues.
• The spawncmd utility gives accurate information more quickly than the Archive
Monitoring Web Client. On the other hand, information displayed by the
Archive Monitoring Web Client is refreshed regularly (by default every two
minutes).
• The Document Pipeline Info gives the same information about DocTools and
document queues as the Archive Monitoring Web Client. Additionally, it allows
an administrator or power user to start and stop single DocTools, to resubmit
documents for processing, and to delete documents from the queues. For more
information, see “Monitoring archiving through Document Pipeline“
on page 217.

21.2.3 Stopping and starting the Spawner


To stop the Spawner, enter one of the following commands:
spawncmd exit
or
net stop spawner

To start the spawner, enter the following command:


net start spawner

Tip: Restarting the Spawner is the first action that should be taken if one or
more DocTools or processes are terminated. This should solve most problems
caused by accidental termination of processes. If not, look at the Spawner log
files and the Document Pipeline log files. For more information, see “Spawner
and Document Pipeline log files” on page 233.

21.2.4 Useful spawncmd commands


21.2.4.1 Starting and stopping single DocTools or processes
To stop a single DocTool or process, enter the command
spawncmd stop <service>
where <service> is the name of the DocTool or the process.

To start a single DocTool or process, enter the command


spawncmd start <service>
where <service> is the name of the DocTool or the process.

Tip: You can also enable or disable a single DocTool by using the Document
Pipeline Info. For details, refer to the online help of the Document Pipeline
Info.

232 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
21.3. Spawner and Document Pipeline log files

Note: Be aware that some processes must be started in a defined sequence, so


simply restarting them will not solve a problem. It is better to restart the
Spawner itself. For more information, see “Stopping and starting the Spawner”
on page 232.

21.2.4.2 Resubmitting documents to the DocTools


If documents are locked in one or more error queues of the Document Pipeline, these
documents must be resubmitted to the DocTools once the problem has been solved.
To resubmit documents using the Command Prompt, either enter the command
spawncmd start stockist
or restart the Spawner. For more information, see “Stopping and starting the
Spawner” on page 232.

Tip: You can also resubmit documents to the DocTools by using the Document
Pipeline Info tool. For details, refer to the online help of the Document Pipeline
Info.

21.2.4.3 Rereading configuration files


If the Document Pipeline configuration files (“servtab” files) have been modified, and
you want to use the new configuration without restarting the Spawner, enter the
following command:
spawncmd reread

You normally need this command for advanced troubleshooting purposes only.

21.3 Spawner and Document Pipeline log files


The Spawner and Document Pipelines log files are all located in the <DP_ROOT>\var
\log directory, where <DP_ROOT> is the installation directory of the Document
Pipelines.

Tip: If the Monitor Server is running on the Document Pipeline computer, the
Spawner log file and all Document Pipeline log files can be accessed using
HTTP. For this, enter one of the following URLs in a browser:
https://<Document Pipeline_host_name>:4061/cgi-bin/tools/log.pl
or
https://<Document Pipeline_IP_address>:4061/cgi-bin/tools/log.pl

Spawner log file The Spawner log file spawner.log shows all DocTools and processes started and
stopped on the Document Pipeline. For more information, see section 35.1 “Spawner
log file” in OpenText Archive Center - Administration Guide (AR-ACN).

Document There are no log files for Document Pipelines. Instead, the processes of the different
Pipeline log DocTools are logged into the corresponding DocTool log files. The name of the log
files
file is the name of the DocTool plus the extension .log, for example the log file of
the DocTool docrm is docrm.log.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 233


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 21 Troubleshooting Document Pipelines for Enterprise Scan

Tip: To find the names of the DocTools used by a particular Document


Pipeline, use Document Pipeline Info or Archive Monitoring Web Client. All
the DocTools are listed here by Document Pipeline. Mark the name of a
processing step and look at the status bar. The corresponding DocTool name is
displayed (for example the Remove document from document pipeline
processing step corresponds to the docrm DocTool).

For most processes, the name of the log file is the name of the process plus the
extension .log. Some processes may use different log file names.

Tip: In order to find which process log files contain relevant information, sort
the <DP_ROOT>\var\log directory by date. Then look at the log files that were
modified when a problem occurred or look at the ones last modified, especially
if they are large.

For more information, see section 35.1 “Spawner log file” in OpenText Archive Center
- Administration Guide (AR-ACN).

234 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 22
Reporting incident to SAP

You can use the SAP incident wizard to report technical issues related to Enterprise
Scan.

Note: To use the SAP incident wizard, you require the SAP authorizations
Report an incident, Send incidents to SAP, and Close incidents, respectively. To
request these, contact your administrator.

To report an incident to SAP:

1. Click Tools > Report Incident To SAP.

2. In the Report Incident To SAP dialog box, define the settings, and then click
Submit.

Server Details

Server
Server name hosting the SAP system.

Port number
Port number of the SAP Server.

Protocol

• http
• https

Incident Details

Priority

• Very High
• High
• Medium
• Low

Summary
Enter a short description of the problem.

Description
Describe the problem.

Log File
The IXClient.log file is attached automatically.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 235


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 22 Reporting incident to SAP

File Set1, File Set2, File Set3


Attach up to three files.

3. Logon to the SAP system, check your entries, and then click Send.

236 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Part 4
Reference
Chapter 23
Menus and icons

The following sections provide an overview of all Enterprise Scan menus and icons.

23.1 File menu


Command Icon Shortcut Menu option Context menu
Scan F11 File > Scan -

Configure Scanner - File > Configure -


Scanner
Rescan File > Rescan

Configure Printing - - File > Configure


Printing
Print - File > Print

Import File > Import

Export - File > Export Export > Export

Send - File > Send Export > Send

Exit - File > Exit -

23.2 Edit menu


Command Icon Shortcut Menu option Context menu
Undo Ctrl + Z Edit > Undo Undo

Redo Ctrl + Y Edit > Redo Redo

Cut - Ctrl + X Edit > Cut Cut


Copy Ctrl + C Edit > Copy Copy

Paste Ctrl + V Edit > Paste Paste

Select All - Ctrl + A Edit > Select All Select All


Invert Selection - Ctrl + Edit > Invert Selection -
Shift + I

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 239


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 23 Menus and icons

Command Icon Shortcut Menu option Context menu


Select Marked Pages - - Edit > Select Marked -
Pages
Go To Edit > Go To

displays the icons of the


navigation toolbar. For
more information, see
“Navigating through
documents and pages”
on page 28, as follows:
Function Icon Shortcut
To previous page (moves Page Up
through documents)
To next page (traverses over Page Down
documents)
To first page of the current Home
document
To previous page in the current Left arrow
document (stops at the beginning
of the current document)
To next page in the current Right arrow
document (stops at the end of the
current document)
To last page of the current End
document
To first page of the first Ctrl+Home
document
To first page of previous -
document
To first page of next document -

To first page of the last document Ctrl+End

To previous bookmark marker Shift+F4

To next bookmark marker F4

To previous delete marker Shift+F5

To next delete marker F5

To previous quality marker Shift+F9

To next quality marker F9

240 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
23.3. View menu

23.3 View menu


Command Icon Shortcut Menu option Context menu
Main Toolbar - - View > Main Toolbar -
Page Toolbar - - View > Page Toolbar -
Document Toolbar - - View > Document -
Toolbar
Profiles Toolbar - - View > Profiles -
Toolbar
Navigation Toolbar - - View > Navigation -
Toolbar
Documents - - View > Documents -
Indexing - - View > Indexing -
Index Item - - View > Index Item -
View - - View > View -
Properties - - View > Properties -
Thumbnails - - View > Thumbnails -
Tree - - View > Tree -
Lock GUI - - View > Lock GUI -
Show Default View - - View > Show Default -
Layout View Layout
Zoom In + View > Zoom In -

Zoom Out - View > Zoom Out -

Fit Window Ctrl+O View > Fit Window In the View view:
Scale > Fit
Window
Fit Width Ctrl+W View > Fit Width In the View view:
Scale > Fit Width
Fit Height Ctrl+H View > Fit Height In the View view:
Scale > Fit
Height

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 241


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 23 Menus and icons

23.4 Page menu


These commands are also available as context menu items in the View view.

Command Icon Shortcut Menu option Context menu


Black Border - Page > Image Filter > Image Filter >
Black Border Black Border
Content Extractor - Page > Image Filter > Image Filter >
Content Extractor Content
Extractor
Content Extractor with - Page > Image Filter > Image Filter >
Preview Content Extractor with Content
Preview Extractor with
Preview
Crop - Page > Image Filter > Image Filter >
Crop Crop
Deskew - Page > Image Filter > Image Filter >
Deskew Deskew
Despeckle - Page > Image Filter > Image Filter >
Despeckle Despeckle
DPI Resampling - Page > Image Filter > Image Filter >
DPI Resampling DPI Resampling
Quality Indicator - Page > Image Filter > Image Filter >
Quality Indicator Quality
Indicator
Smooth - Page > Image Filter > Image Filter >
Smooth Smooth
Conversion to 16 - Page > Color Color
Million Colors Conversion > Conversion >
Conversion to 16 Conversion to 16
Million Colors Million Colors
Conversion to 2 Colors - Page > Color Color
Conversion > Conversion >
Conversion to 2 Colors Conversion to 2
Colors
Conversion to 256 - Page > Color Color
Colors Conversion > Conversion >
Conversion to 256 Conversion to
Colors 256 Colors
Conversion to - Page > Color Color
Grayscale Conversion > Conversion >
Conversion to Conversion to
Grayscale Grayscale
Rotate 180° - Page > Rotate 180° Rotation >
Rotate > 180°

242 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
23.5. Document menu

Command Icon Shortcut Menu option Context menu


Rotate Left - Page > Rotate Left Rotation >
Rotate > Left
Rotate Right - Page > Rotate Right Rotation >
Rotate > Right
Remove Blank Pages - Page > Remove Blank Erase > Remove
Pages Blank Pages
Delete SHIFT+DEL Page > Delete Erase > Delete

Delete Marked CTRL+D Page > Delete Marked Erase > Delete
Marked
Bookmark Marker F3 Page > Bookmark Marker >
Marker Bookmark
Marker
Delete Marker DEL Page > Delete Marker Marker > Delete
Marker
Quality Marker F8 Page > Quality Marker Marker >
Quality Marker

23.5 Document menu


Most of these commands are also available as context menu items in the Documents
view.

Command Icon Shortcut Menu option Context menu


Separate before F7 Document > Separate > Separate >
Selection Separate before Separate before
Selection Selection
Separate by Barcode - Document > Separate > Separate >
Separate by Barcode Separate by
Barcode
Separate by Blank Page - Document > Separate > Separate >
Separate by Blank Separate by
Page Blank Page
Separate by every Nth - Document > Separate > Separate >
Page Separate by every Nth Separate by
Page every Nth Page
Separate by Patch Code - Document > Separate > Separate >
Separate by Patch Separate by
Code Patch Code
Classify by Barcode - Document > Classify > Classify >
Classify by Barcode Classify by
Barcode

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 243


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 23 Menus and icons

Command Icon Shortcut Menu option Context menu


Classify by Patch Code - Document > Classify > Classify >
Classify by Patch Classify by
Code Patch Code
Archive All F2 Document > Archive -
All
Archive Selected F12 Document > Archive -
Selected
Change Index Ctrl+I Document > Change Document
Index Operation >
Change Index
Homogenize - Document > Document
Homogenize Operation >
Homogenize
Join F6 Document > Join Document
Operation > Join
Merge - Document > Merge Document
Operation >
Merge
Move to Batch - - Document > Move to Document
Batch Operation >
Move to Batch
Move to Folder - - Document > Move to Document
Folder Operation >
Move to Folder
Move to Group - - Document > Move to Document
Group Operation >
Move to Group
Move to Position Ctrl+P Document > Move to Document
Position Operation >
Move to Position
Reverse - Document > Reverse Document
Operation >
Reverse

244 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
23.6. Profile menu

23.6 Profile menu


Command Icon Shortcut Menu option Context menu
Manage Profiles - - Profile > Manage -
Profiles
Configure Current - - Profile > Configure -
Current
Switch to - - Profile > Switch to -
Configure Input - Shift + Profile > Configure -
F11 Input
Configure Processing - - Profile > Configure -
Processing
Configure Archiving - - Profile > Configure -
Archiving

23.7 Tools menu


Command Icon Shortcut Menu option Context menu
User Options - - Tools > User Options -
Workstation Options - - Tools > Workstation -
Options
Areas Configuration - - Tools > Areas -
Configuration
Permissions - - Tools > Permissions -
Customize Keyboard - - Tools > Customize -
Keyboard
Export Configuration - - Tools > Export -
Configuration
Import Configuration - - Tools > Import -
Configuration
Make Configuration - - Tools > Make -
Shared Configuration Shared
Server and Document - - Tools > Server and -
Pipeline Settings Document Pipeline
Settings
Transactional Content - Tools > Transactional -
Processing Sign In Content Processing
Sign In
Content Server Sign In - Tools > Content Server -
Sign In

SAP Sign In - - Tools > SAP Sign In -

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 245


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 23 Menus and icons

Command Icon Shortcut Menu option Context menu


Archiving from - - Tools > Archiving -
Leading Application from Leading
Application

23.8 Help menu


Command Icon Shortcut Menu option Context menu
in view
Contents - F1 Help > Contents -
Search for Help on - - Help > Search for Help -
on
Customer Help - - Help > Customer Help -
About Enterprise Scan - - Help > About -
Enterprise Scan

246 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 24

Using a template for scan operator checklists

As the used scanning and archiving scenarios are very specific to each company and
the single scan operator often does not have the time to read the whole Enterprise
Scan user guide, it is useful that the administrator creates a kind of checklist for the
daily work of the scan operators.
This chapter should serve as the basis for this checklist. Copy the text to a text editor,
delete the items that are not relevant to your company, and add your company-
specific scanning and archiving scenarios (see the paragraphs with in angle brackets
<>).

A good scanning preparation can simplify scanning and postprocessing of the


documents. Which steps are required depends on the quality of the paper
documents, your type of separation, and so on.

To prepare scanning:

1. Sort the documents according to the scan profiles used:

• Document content (for example invoices, offers)


• Document legibility (for example very good, normal, bad, very bad)

2. Insert empty pages for separating the individual documents, if needed.

3. Insert additional preparation tasks.

To scan the documents:

1. Start the scanner.

2. Start Enterprise Scan by clicking Programs > Start > OpenText > Enterprise
Scan.

3. Select the profile in the list box.

4. Put the documents into the scanner.

5. Start the scanning operation with File > Scan, or click .

6. If a page gets folded during scanning, smooth the paper original, delete the
page in Enterprise Scan with Page > Delete and rescan it with menu File > Scan,
or click .

7. Archive the documents to the external storage with File > Archive all if the
postprocessing will be done on another workstation.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 247


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 24 Using a template for scan operator checklists

The problems that occur regularly during scanning should be corrected


automatically through the processing subprofile during the scanning. But additional
problems might occur that have to be corrected manually.

To postprocess the scanned pages:

1. Scan the documents from the external storage if the physical scanning has been
performed on another workstation or by a service provider.
2. Check all pages for order, completeness and quality.
3. Mark the pages that are not scanned correctly and need further processing:

a. Select each page you want to mark.


b. Set the markers with Edit > Select Marked Pages and the following:

Bookmark Marker Insert this marker for pages that need


further inspection.

Quality Marker Insert this marker for pages with low


legibility.

Delete Marker Insert this marker for pages that exist


more than once and should be deleted.

4. Perform the required postprocessing steps:

• Enter, modify, or delete an index with Document > Change Index if the
barcode or patch code was not recognized correctly.
• Subdivide a document into several documents if the automatic separation
has failed during scanning:

248 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
a. Select the page that should be the first page of the new document.
b. Split the document with Document > Separate > Separate before
Selection.
• Correct pages with bad quality:

• Search for marked pages with Page > Quality Marker.


• Increase the color depth to the same value of all document pages with
Document > Homogenize.
• Reduce or increase the color depth of a single page.
• If a scanned page is illegible, you might delete it with Page > Delete and
rescan it with File > Scan, or click . It might be necessary to choose
another profile or subprofile according to the document quality.
• Insert additional postprocessing tasks to increase the legibility.

5. Insert additional postprocessing tasks.

6. If you are not able to solve a problem by yourself, please contact your
administrator for further inspection:
Attach each scanned page to an e-mail with File > Send and send the e-mail to
your administrator.

7. Archive the documents to the external storage with Document > Archive all if
the archiving will be done by another person.

The archiving of the documents differs from one company to the other. Therefore,
there are few common steps. Add your company-specific steps to this section.

To index and archive the documents:

1. Scan the documents from the external storage if the scanning and
postprocessing have been performed on another workstation or by a service
provider.

2. Select the archiving profile in the list box.


In the Indexing view, you enter the properties of the document that are later
used to retrieve the document in the archive. The cursor is in the first index
field. Mandatory fields are marked with .
In the Index Item view, the part of the document where the needed information
for indexing can be read is enlarged (only valid with the example script listed as
step 12 in “Working with scripts for indexing and archiving“ on page 251). This
part is also highlighted in the View view in a defined color (default: red) so that
the area can be seen in the context of the whole page.

3. Read the property, for example the customer name, in the Index Item view and
enter it in the corresponding field in the Indexing view.

4. Press Enter to go to the next index field.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 249


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 24 Using a template for scan operator checklists

The entered values are checked and the detailed information for the next index
field is displayed in the Index Item view.

Note: If the entered values are not correct, the icon appears behind the
index field. Move the cursor pointer into the respective index field to get
detailed error information.

5. Fill in all index fields for the document.

6. Press F12 to archive the document.


The document is archived and the next document in the document stack
appears in the Index Item view.

7. Perform the indexing of all documents in the document stack.

8. Press F2 to archive all documents in the document stack.


The documents are archived.
After all documents are archived, the document stack is empty.

9. Enter your scenario-specific steps for archiving.

250 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 25
Working with scripts for indexing and archiving

To enhance the functionality of the document indexing, you can attach scripts to
each indexing field defined. For more information, see “Configuring custom index
fields” on page 133.

You can find scripting examples in the Knowledge Center (https://


knowledge.opentext.com/go/EnterpriseScan_OTDN).

The scripting language is JScript.NET, part of the .NET family of languages, because
major parts of Enterprise Scan itself are written for the .NET platform.

Important
Indexing as defined within Enterprise Scan is not document-centric. This
means that the index information entered into an indexing form is not saved
to a document. It is only transferred as metadata along with the document to
the export process.

General Scripting support is an extension to Enterprise Scan, which allows you to integrate
overview business logic into the handling of the metadata as defined by the indexing process
within Enterprise Scan. These extensions can harness additional logic in the
following distinct areas:
• The processing phase.
• The interactive phase. For more information, see “Scripts in the interactive
phase” on page 251.
• The export phase. For more information, see “Scripts in the export phase”
on page 258).

25.1 Scripts in the interactive phase


The scripting options in this phase are linked to the indexing fields in the indexing
mask. They are defined using the configuration wizard for the indexing form. For
more information, see “Configuring indexing” on page 131.

Four kinds of scripts can be attached to each indexing field:

Initialization script
This script is performed once per document to ease the indexing process.
After restarting Enterprise Scan, the initialization script is not performed for
documents that have already been initialized in previous sessions.
Use the script to:
1. Prefill each field with document specific values.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 251


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 25 Working with scripts for indexing and archiving

2. Initialize global list boxes (Field.Choices for fields with owner Global).
Another benefit of the Initialization script is the correct display of multiple
selections.

Notes
• With version 10.0 the old Initialization script was renamed to Selection
script.
• The old configuration of Initialization script version 9.7 is automatically
migrated to Selection script version 10.0.
• In earlier versions of Enterprise Scan initialization was performed for
every document selection, that is changes of field values by users were
overwritten by the script.

Initialization script of version 10.0


Example:

// Correct
Field.Value = Document["Barcode"];

Initialization script of version 9.7 (now Selection script)


Example:

// Incorrect: User entry will be overridden


Field.Value = Document["Barcode"];

Display of multiple selection:

Initialization script of version 10.0


The execution is performed on each document of a multiple selection.

Initialization script of version 9.7 (now Selection script)


The execution is not performed on multiple selection. Due to a missing
initialization field it could be displayed white (all field values are
equal) in contradiction to subsequent initialization.

Selection script
This script is performed to implement additional configuration for the indexing
mask:
1. Initialization of document list boxes: Field.Choices. Only for fields with
owner Document.
2. Locking in the field against modification: Field.ReadOnly
3. Changing the unit of the field: Field.Unit
4. Limiting the length of the value: Field.Length
5. Specifying the number of decimals: Field.Scale
For every field with the owner Global, this script is called for every document
selection change.

252 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
25.1. Scripts in the interactive phase

For fields with the owner Document, the script is only called for single
document selection change. In case of multi-document selection change, the
script is not called.
The scripts are called in the order the fields visually appear in the indexing form
from top to bottom.

Validation script
This script is performed when the users modify a field value or the document is
to be exported, for example:

• Another control is activated by mouse click so that the control to be validated


looses focus.
• Input is confirmed by ENTER key.
• Input is confirmed by TAB key.
• Another item from a list box is selected.

A validation failure is reported by the indexing mask:

When the user confirms the input by pressing the ENTER or TAB key and
validation succeeds, the focus changes to the next field in the indexing mask or,
if the mask is completed, the next document is selected. If validation fails, the
focus stays on the field for immediate correction.

Updating script
This script is called after a successful validation and should be used by the script
author to update the values of other fields, based on the current field value.

Within each script above, the following information is available:

• Indexing field info (only for each indexing field):

value
Current value as seen by the scan user in the application GUI. For every
value, the script writer can also define a display value. This is displayed to the
scan user in the GUI only. Any access to the value from scripts returns the
real value. This is done by assigning a pair of values: (displayvalue,
realvalue) to the field value instead of a single value.
The value should be initialized by Initialization script and validated by the
Validation script.
Field.Value = "a value"

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 253


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 25 Working with scripts for indexing and archiving

choices
List of all possible values for list type fields.
The picklist should be initialized by the Selection script.
Field.Choices.Add("Option 1")
Field.Choices.Add("Option 2")

name
Internal name of field (different from display name), read-only.
It is specified in the configuration dialog box.
var s:string = Field.Name

unit
Abbreviation to display beside the string label to inform the user of the units
of measure.
Should be initialized by the Selection script.
Field.Unit = "mm"

length
Maximum length of data entered into a field (for string types, the length of
the string, for decimal types, the total number of digits in the number).
Should be initialized by the Selection script.
Field.Length = 10

scale
For decimal types, specifies the total number of digits before the decimal
point (it should be less than length above).
Should be initialized by the Selection script.
Field.Scale = 5

ReadOnly
Method of type bool for all indexing fields. When you set the field property
ReadOnly to true, the application restricts the user from entering any value
manually in the text box through the user interface. That means that the text
box becomes non-editable.
Should be initialized by the Selection script.
Field.ReadOnly = true;
Fields["other field"].ReadOnly = true;

Visible
Method of type bool for all indexing fields. When you set the field property
Visible to true, the application hides indexing fields to the scan operator.

Notes

• The visibility of a field does not affect the structure of the indexing
mask, that is every field stays at its current position. This can cause
gaps in indexing fields if invisible fields are not placed at the end.

254 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
25.1. Scripts in the interactive phase

• If invisible fields are placed at the end and the height of the indexing
view is too small for displaying all defined fields there will be a scroll
bar displayed although all visible fields are displayed.
• A field and its corresponding lable and border can be hidden, but
additional elements that are added when the indexing mask is
created are still visible, for example buttons, mandatory icon, or
separator lines. To hide a field, use plain fields.

Field.Visible = true;
• Context information:
This is a persistent storage location for the script writer. Any information saved
here will be kept across all script invocations if provided the scan user does not
switch the profile. If the user changes the profile this information is lost. The
script writer can use this to save log in information and so on. This is exposed as
a hash container and can be considered storage for global variables.

Context["hello"] = "world"
• Validation result:
Within this script, the script writer can at any time call the method
Validation.Fail("error message") with an error message that is displayed
by the scan application. This signals to the user that the data entered was not
correct. Enterprise Scan leaves the focus inside the field in question.

Data objects are defined in the table below:

• Information about the current document (available in the Initialization script


and Selection scripts):

Information Code sample


Barcode Document["Barcode"]
2D Barcode Document["Barcode2D"]
All barcodes in document Document["Barcodes"]
All 2D barcodes in document Document["Barcodes2D"]
Patchcode Document["Patchcode"]
Endorser Document["Endorser"]
Ocr Text Document["OcrText"]
Index Document["Index"]
Group Document["Group"]
Pagecount Document.PageCount
Ixattr Document["IxAttrFile"]
Commands Document["CommandsFile"]

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 255


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 25 Working with scripts for indexing and archiving

Information Code sample


Page Document.Pages[<page_no>]
Barcodes on page N/A
Page images (XImage) Document.Pages[<no>].Image.Data
Unique ID Document["UniqueID"]

• Information valid for the whole application:

Total number of documents inside Application.DocumentCount


scan
Total number of documents Application.SelectedDocumentCount
currently selected
Language of the scan GUI Application.UserLanguage
This is an integer value holding the locale identifier
(LCID) of the currently selected GUI language. The
following values for LCIDs are used in Enterprise
Scan:
• Czech: 1029
• English: 1033
• French: 1036
• German: 1031
• Japanese: 1041
• Portuguese: 1046
• Spanish: 1034

Immediate From within indexing Initialization script, it is possible to trigger an immediate


shutdown shutdown of the application with a script like:

AppShutdown.Request("<MyMessage>");

For example:

AppShutdown.Request("myLogMsg - immediate shutdown!");

Notes

• An immediate shutdown is only required for special customization projects.


• The message <MyMessage> is not logged in the log file.
• The AppShutdown.Request script is only valid in the indexing Initialization
script.

It is important to know in what situations the various scripts are performed by


Enterprise Scan. The following table describes the possibilities as mapped to three
different user scenarios.

256 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
25.1. Scripts in the interactive phase

User scenario User Scripts actions Note


actions
Indexing a Select one If document is not initialized,
single document Initialization script is called (for all
document fields in indexing mask).
In each case, Selection script is called
(for all fields in indexing mask).
Fill index Validation script and Update script Update script
mask are called for those indexing fields only called if a
edited by the user. validate is
successful. This
step is optional.
F12 Validation script is called for every
index field.
Indexing Multi-select If document is not initialized, Selection script
multiple documents Initialization script is called. is not called for
documents (mouse or Selection script is called for fields fields with
keyboard) with owner Global. owner
Document.
Fill index Validation script is called for those
mask indexing fields edited by the user.
Update script is called for all fields
with owner Global. In case of multi-
selection, the update script is not
called for fields with owner
Document.
F12 If document is not initialized,
Initialization script is called.
Validate script is called for every
index field.
Indexing all Fill index Validation script is called for those Index mask
documents at mask indexing fields edited by the user. contains values
once Update script is called for all fields from previous
with owner Global. In case of multi- Initialization
selection, the update script is not script.
called for fields with owner
Document.
Ctrl-F12 Validation script is called for every
index field.

In summary a script writer can rely on the following workflow:

1. Initialization script, called exactly once.

2. Selection script, called at least once.

3. Validation script, called at least once. With user selection F2 or F12 back to step
2.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 257


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 25 Working with scripts for indexing and archiving

4. Update script, called after successful validation. With user selection F2 or F12
back to step 3.

5. Archiving:

a. Pre-Archive script.
b. Add Document Attributes script.
c. Set Document Pipeline Attributes script.

25.2 Scripts in the export phase


For batch processing scenarios, it may be better to spare the user the task of entering
data, for example, when the barcode of the document gives enough information to
fill in the rest of the indexing form. In this case, putting the script in the export phase
has the advantage of leaving less room for user errors.
For this purpose, there is a script available and it is defined within an export plug-in,
Add Document Attributes, that should be inserted typically as the first plug-in in
the export processing steps.

Note: GUI operations should not be performed in this script as doing so will
interfere with the GUI handling of the main scan application.

The scripting language is JScript.NET. The information and context available within
this script are similar to the scripts in the interactive phase above with some
differences as explained in the following table.

Context This global object works exactly as in initialization, selection, update and
validation scripts. Values are shared among all scripts.
var s = Context["MyVal"];
Context["YourVal"] = "Abcd";
Application Used to communicate with the archiving procedure.
Application.DocumentCount Retrieves number of documents in
this archiving batch.
Application.SkipDocument Set to true to silently skip the
current document.
Application.StopArchiving Set to true to display a message to
the user. User may choose whether
to continue archiving.
Application.ErrorMessage If stop archiving was set to true,
text assigned to this property will
be displayed in the message.
Application.StopArchivingSi Set to true to cancel the current
lent(extension to archiving loop without prompting
Application.StopArchiving) the user. When script is performed,
no log message is displayed in the
log file.
Document The archived document. Works in the same way as other scripts.

258 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
25.2. Scripts in the export phase

Fields Read or modify indexing values for current document.


Fields["MyFieldName"].Displ Retrieve the display name of field
ayName with name MyFieldName. You can
read and write this value, so it is
also possible to set it.
Fields["MyFieldName"].Value Get or set value of field
MyFieldName. When setting value,
type of assigned value must match
the existing value.
Fields.SetBool("MyFieldName Overwrites (including type) or adds
", true) new boolean (Flag) field
MyFieldName and sets it to true.
Fields.SetString, Similar functionality as SetBool
Fields.SetInt, for other types.
Fields.SetDecimal,
Fields.SetDate,
Fields.SetTime,
Fields.SetDataTime
Fields.RemoveField("MyField Removes field MyFieldName.
Name")
The initial content of fields is taken from the interactive part of indexing
(indexing mask). Each archived document receives a copy of the data;
therefore, a change made to one document’s index values is not
propagated to another document.

When modifying indexing data in the Add Document Attributes plug-in, it is


important to follow the conventions for indexing field names. Otherwise the index
fields will be ignored by the export plug-in:
• Content Server rules: <Category ID>[.<Version>]:<Attribute
name>0:<System attribute name>
• SAP rules: <Table name>:<Column name>
• TCP rules: <Record type ID>:<Property type ID>

OpenText recommends that you import the category specification or record type,
copy the field names, and remove the fields in question from the indexing mask.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 259


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 25 Working with scripts for indexing and archiving

25.3 Global function depot


In Enterprise Scan, you can configure custom scripts in various places:
• Init-Profile script (archiving subprofile)
• Document processing script
• Indexing - Initialization script
• Indexing - Selection script
• Indexing - Validation script
• Indexing - Update script
• Archiving - Pre-Archive script
• Archiving - Add Document Attributes script
• Archiving - Set Document Pipeline Attributes script

The Global Function Depot enables you to collect script code in one global depot.

When you enter script in the Script field and click OK, the script is saved and
available across all main profiles and subprofiles wherever scripting is allowed. All
scripting configuration dialogs have the Open Global Function Depot button.

In any of the scripting configuration dialogs boxes, you can enter script that calls a
function that is defined in the Global Function Depot. Some properties, however,
are only valid in a certain context. For example, Application.StopArchiving is
only valid in Add Document Attributes and Pre-Archive scripts. So there are only
two places where you can use this property.

Each time a custom script is performed, the script from the Global Function Depot
will also be compiled along with the current script.

If the Global Function Depot contains a function that uses a script property, for
example Application.StopArchving, and that is not valid for the current context
or the current custom script, it will throw an error for compilation as well as for
execution of the script.

To avoid this, the Global Function Depot provides conditional compilation statements.
For more information, see “Conditional compilation statements” on page 261.

Use Load, Save and Compile to open, store and test the scripts.

Use References to add a reference to third party libraries. For more information, see
“Assigning third party libraries” on page 155.

You can share, export and import global functions. For more information, see
“Sharing, exporting, and importing the configuration“ on page 199. If you import
global functions on a computer with existing global functions, the imported global
functions are appended to the existing functions.

260 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
25.3. Global function depot

25.3.1 Conditional compilation statements


The Global Function Depot enables you to define functions for all custom scripts. A
function defined for one custom script may not be valid in another custom script.
This would lead to compilation errors since the global functions always get
compiled along with the custom scripts.

To avoid compilation errors, the Global Function Depot provides conditional


compilation statements. Including the context specific functions within the conditional
compilation statements will ensure that these functions are compiled only in the
right context.

The following conditional compilation statements are available:

@SCRIPT_TYPE_INITPROFILE
Conditional compilation statements for the Init-Profile script. Currently Init-
Profile does not support any scripting proxies or attributes.

@SCRIPT_TYPE_INDEXING
Conditional compilation statements for indexing scripts (initialization, selection,
validation, and update).

@SCRIPT_TYPE_PROCESSING
Conditional compilation statements for the processing Scripting Extension
script.

@SCRIPT_TYPE_PREARCHIVE
Conditional compilation statements for the Pre-archive script.

@SCRIPT_TYPE_ADDDOCATTR
Conditional compilation statements for the Add Document Attributes script.

@SCRIPT_TYPE_SETDOCATTR
Conditional compilation statements for the Set Document Pipeline Attributes
script.

@SCRIPT_TYPE
Conditional compilation statements for checking for various scripting types.

You can find examples for compilation statements in the Global Function Depot
section in the Indexing and Scripting Guide in OpenText Developer Network (OTDN)
(https://knowledge.opentext.com/go/EnterpriseScan_OTDN).

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 261


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 26
Separating documents by barcode and sorting into
groups using regular expressions

The example in this chapter shows the settings in the processing subprofile which
are needed to separate and classify documents by barcode and regular expressions.
Other profile and subprofile settings are not explained.

The example allows scanning into three different groups. Two groups (group1 and
group2) will identify specific barcode-groups, which begin with two different
character strings, 021 and 131 for group1, and 022 and 232 for group2. The third
group (group3) will contain all documents which do not fit into one of the other
groups.

To configure document separation by barcode and group classification using


regular expressions:

1. Create a new profile with the usual options you use for the input device.
2. Create a Processing subprofile, and then add the following operations to the
flow:

• To separate documents by barcode: Barcode Recognition (Page Processing),


and Separation by Barcode (Document Creation)
• To classify documents into groups: Classification by Barcode (Document
Classification)
3. Configure Barcode Recognition in the flow.
Select the barcode type you want to search for, and then enter the settings
according to your barcode. On the Configure tab, select the Recognize all
barcodes on page check box. For more information, see “Configuring barcode
recognition” on page 91
4. Configure Separation by Barcode. For more information, see “Configuring
separation by barcode” on page 112.
5. Configure Classification by Barcode for document classification into the three
groups. For more information, see “Configuring classification by barcode”
on page 123).

a. Click Add to enter new classification rules for the three groups.
b. Enter the three groups, the barcode type under Recognize barcodes and
the respective Regular expression:

• Group1: All barcodes beginning with 021 and 131. Regular expression:

[0][2][1][0-9]*|[1][3][1][0-9]*

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 263


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 26 Separating documents by barcode and sorting into groups using regular
expressions

• Group2: All barcodes beginning with 022 and 232. Regular expression:

[0][2][2][0-9]*|[2][3][2][0-9]*
• Group3: All barcodes that do not begin with 021, 131 and 022, 232.
Regular expression:

^[0][2][1][0-9]*|^[1][3][1][0-9]*|^[0][2][2][0-9]*|^[2][3]
[2][0-9]*|[0-9]*

Documents that fulfill the conditions are now assigned to group1, group2
or group3.

264 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 27
Rendering PDFs with an external tool

Notes
• This feature is disabled by default with installation of patch ESC_1050-002
and higher. You can activate it by setting the following registry key under
HKLM:
[HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\IXOS\IXOS_ARCHIVE\6.0\Scan]
"EnableRenditionWithExternalTool"=dword:00000001
• OpenText recommends to use the “Searchable PDF Doctool” to render PDF
files. For more information, see “Searchable PDF Doctool“ on page 287.

Enterprise Scan supports PDF as file input format by leveraging an external


rendering tool in the file input step. You can render PDF with multiple pages into a
TIFF with multiple pages or another supported document format using, for
example, the tools ImageMagick and Ghostscript. For supported document formats
and external software versions, see Release Notes.

To convert a PDF into another document format:

1. Install the external tool to render the PDF.


2. Create a command file with the name convert_pdf.cmd.
3. Save the command file used for All Users in <CommonApplication Data>
\OpenText\Enterprise Scan\.
If you want to use the command file for the Default User, save it in
<Application Data>\OpenText\Enterprise Scan\.

Tip: If a command file exists in <Default User - Application Data> it


overrides an existing common handler or adds a new handler for the
default user.
4. Open the command file and enter the command for rendition.
For every matching PDF file, Enterprise Scan creates a new subprocess and runs
the command file with the following parameters:

• %1: Fullpath of the input file (a short path without blanks, and so on)
• %2: Fullpath of the output directory where the rendered images must be
created by the command file. The path includes a backslash at the end (a
short path without blanks, and so on).

The rendered documents must be created in the output directory with names
that represent the correct order of the pages (alphabetically sorted names).
The following are examples for an ImageMagick PDF command file
(convert_pdf.cmd):

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 265


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 27 Rendering PDFs with an external tool

• "C:\Program Files\ImageMagick-<version>\convert.exe" -density


150 %1 %2converted_%%03d.jpg
This command file creates a JPG image for every page of the input PDF file
named converted_000.jpg, converted_001.jpg, and so on.
• "C:\Program Files\ImageMagick-<version>\convert.exe" -monochrome
-density 200 -compress group4 %1 %2converted.tif
This command file creates a TIFF with multiple pages image file containing
all pages of the input PDF file.

5. Configure the input directory. For more information, see “Configuring file
input” on page 67.

Troubleshoot- If the process exits normally, Enterprise Scan verifies that at least one image file
ing for exit code exists in the output directory. After further processing the rendered images in the
output directory are deleted by Enterprise Scan.

If the process exits with the value != 0, for example, exit 1 in command file,
Enterprise Scan aborts the handling of the input file and adds logging information:
ERROR 2010/12/03 14:35:50:050 EnterpriseScan.exe:
1772\Input.FileSystem.dll:3844 renderimages.cpp,274 MSG0 Input file
rendition process exit value is set
ERROR 2010/12/03 14:35:50:050 EnterpriseScan.exe:
1772\Input.FileSystem.dll:3844 renderimages.cpp,341 MSG0 ErrorCode: 1
ERROR 2010/12/03 14:35:50:050 EnterpriseScan.exe:
1772\Input.FileSystem.dll:3844 fileinptbase.cpp,647 MSG0 Cannot render
input file E:\FileInput\Images\Overview.pdf

If the user command file exits with an error, the command file handle the error
appropriately.

Tips
• If the command window is closed by the x-button this is also recognized as
an exit code and further processing of this file is aborted in Enterprise Scan.
• Exit Code 3221225786, 0xC000013A, -1073741510: The application is
terminated as a result of CTRL+C. This indicates that the application has
been terminated either by pressing CTRL+C, or CTRL+BREAK, or by
closing the command window.

Troubleshoot- If the command file returns without error (exit 0), Enterprise Scan checks the
ing for no output directory for files. But if there are no files in the directory, check the file input
rendered
images
configuration:

• If the check box Skip non image files is selected, Enterprise Scan ignores the
rendition failure but adds a log entry: ERROR 2010/12/03 15:00:14:552
EnterpriseScan.exe:3360\Input.FileSystem.dll:2984
fileinptbase.cpp,655 MSG0 No rendered images created from input file
E:\FileInput\Images\OEM Install.pdf

266 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
• If the Skip non image files check box is not selected, Enterprise Scan shows a
dialog box and asks for further handling.
As Enterprise Scan cannot check whether all pages of the input file are rendered,
implement error handling for the rendition tool used by the command file.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 267


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 28
Working with placeholders for notes

The following placeholders can be combined as Note Format. During archiving,


notes are generated and the placeholders are replaced by their current values.

placeholder replaced by
%n note sent from the leading application
\n line break (new line)
© copyright character (no placeholder)
\t tab character
%u Windows log in name
%b document index (barcode)
%D.%M.%Y current date (day, month, year)
%h:%m current time (hour in 24 hour format,
minute)
%I hour in 12 hour format
%p AM/PM sign
%% % character
\\ \ character

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 269


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 29
Using color reduction methods

Floyd-Steinberg dithering
Fastest algorithm for color dithering (reduction) for high-quality results.

Note: This method is set by default because it provides satisfactory results


in the majority of cases.

Stevenson-Arce dithering
Slowest color reduction method. Uses an algorithm for color dithering.

Note: This method is very costly in terms of time and required storage
space. However, sometimes it can provide even better results than Floyd-
Steinberg dithering.

Nearest Color
Fast color reduction method. Provides very low-quality results and does not use
an algorithm for color dithering.

Ordered dithering
Fast color reduction method. Provides very low-quality results and does not use
an algorithm for color dithering, but is slightly better than Nearest Color.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 271


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 30

Working with regular expressions

The barcode module allows checking the recognized text of barcodes against a
regular expression. To match regular expressions, Enterprise Scan uses a public
domain library.

Definition A regular expression is a string of characters that describes a search pattern.


Basically, you can compare a regular expression with a wildcard character, used for
searching in a file system, such as the *, as in *.doc, which is used to find any
document with the extension .doc. However, regular expressions are much more
complex.

Regular expressions serve as a kind of filter for text. For example, it is possible to
find all words beginning with “S” and ending with “R” without having to determine
the characters in between. In this example search, the word “Scanner” would be a
match.

Syntax Regular expressions use, among others, the following elements:

A...Z, a...z Uppercase and lowercase characters


0...9 Digits
. The dot matches any single character.
^ “Not” operator

Example: ^w matches any single character, excluding “w”.


| “Or” connector. It matches its predecessor element and its successor
element.

Example: beard|board matches “beard” and “board”.


+ An element followed by + matches one or more of the predecessor.

Example: wo+rd matches “word”, “woord”, and “wooord” and so on, but
it does not match “wrd”.
* An element followed by * matches zero or more of the predecessor.

Example: wo*rd matches “wrd”, “word”, and “woord” and so on


? An element followed by ? matches zero or one of the predecessor.

Example: wo?rd matches “wrd” and “word”.


(...) Parentheses indicate the grouping of elements.

Example: (word)+ matches “word”, “wordword” and so on

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 273


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 30 Working with regular expressions

[...] Brackets indicate a range. Ranges match any single character within the
sequence inside the brackets.

Examples: b[eo]ard matches “beard” and “board”.

[1-8] matches any digit from 1 to 8.


{...} Curly braces repeat the predecessor element a specific number of times.

Example: wo{2,3}rd matches “woord” and “wooord”, but it does not


match “word” or “woooord”.

[0-9]{3} matches a number between 000 to 999.

Example 30-1: Using regular expressions for barcode recognition

Scenario 1 The following barcode values should be accepted:


• LEA-0001-2345678
• LEA-0002-3456789
• LEA-1234
• LEA-3456

The following barcode values should be rejected:


• LEA-2345

Regular expression:

(LEA-(?^2345)[0-9]{4,4}([-][0-9]*)?)

Explanation

LEA-
The first four characters have to be LEA-.
(?!2345)[0-9]{4,4}
The next 4 characters must not be 2345 and must be a repetition of 4
times 0-9.
[-]
Next character could be -.
[0-9]*
The next characters must be in the range 0-9 with a repetition from 0 to
x.
([-][0-9]*)?
Matches LEA-(?!2345)[0-9]{4,4} and optional ([-][0-9]*).

Scenario 2 The following barcode values should be accepted:


• LEA-0001-2345678

274 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
• LEA-0002-3456789
• LEA-1234
• LEA-3456

The following barcode values should be rejected:


• LEA-2345
• LEA-6789

Regular expression:

(LEA-(?!2345)(?!6789)[0-9]{4,4}([-][0-9]*)?)

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 275


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 31
Improving the quality of scanned pages

If the quality of the scanned page is not optimal, a variety of reasons are possible:

A poor-quality electronic image


In this case, you will have to adjust the scanning configuration settings, re-scan
the sample, and examine the image again.

Flaws in the paper original


This includes unclear print, illegible details, or “dirty copy”. In some cases, you
can improve the image quality by adapting the scanner settings. In other cases,
you will have to correct the page in Enterprise Scan after scanning. Enterprise
Scan provides you with filters that you can use to clean pages.
If an original is badly creased, very dark or dirty, it may be useful to copy the
page first and then scan it.

Note: If problems with certain paper qualities recur frequently, contact the
person sending you this type of paper.

Barcode cannot be recognized on some pages


In addition to changing the settings for barcode recognition, it sometimes helps
to clean the glass of the scanner and straighten up the original page.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 277


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Part 5
Imaging Enterprise Scan Web Interface
Part 5 Imaging Enterprise Scan Web Interface

The Imaging Enterprise Scan Web Interface module brings scanning capacity to the
user interface of Content Server. The scanning functionality is accompanied by the
indexing feature. Users can scan an image and run an indexing session in the same
user interface (Scan & Index).

Notes
• The Scan & Index function is only available for the Folder object type.
• You can archive to all object types, except Collection, LiveReport,
MileStone, Poll, Shortcut, Workflow Status, and URL.

Prerequisites The following applications must to be installed prior to work with the Imaging
Enterprise Scan Web Interface:
• Content Server
• Imaging Enterprise Scan Web Interface module. For more information, see
section 3 “Installing the OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan Web Interface
module” in OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan Web Interface - Installation Guide
(CLESW-IGD).

280 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 32

Configuring Imaging Enterprise Scan Web Interface

To configure settings for Imaging Enterprise Scan Web Interface:

1. On the Content Server Administration page, click the Enterprise Scan -


Webinterface Configuration link in the Enterprise Scan - Webinterface section.

2. On the Enterprise Scan - Webinterface Configuration page, configure the


settings for Enterprise Scan Web Interface, and then click Save Changes.

Scan Group Name


Virtually, every user can access the Scan & Index function. But you can
specify a valid group name to make the function accessible only for
members of this group. For more information about Content Server users
and user groups, see the Content Server documentation.
Leave the field empty to apply no restriction.

Enable Scanning Into Personal Workspace


Controls access to Personal Workspace. Clear the check box to avoid
displaying the Scan & Index menu item for any of the folders inside
Personal Workspace.

Enable Scanning Into Enterprise Workspace


Controls access to Enterprise Workspace. Clear the check box to avoid
displaying the Scan & Index menu item for any of the folders inside
Enterprise Workspace.

Default Host Name and Default Port Number


Configures a connection of Imaging Enterprise Scan Web Interface to
Content Server. These parameters provides option to override the
parameter values in Livelink-Scan-Feed.

Note: Livelink-Scan-Feed (LSF) is generated by the Web Interface


module and used by Enterprise Scan to establish a session with
Content Server. Content Server running under a load-balancer
environment results in instance specific connection parameters in the
LSF.

Notes

• Incorrect configuration of the Imaging Enterprise Scan Web Interface


module results in inaccessible functionality. The Scan & Index menu
item is not available for Personal and Enterprise Workspace and
virtually does not exist.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 281


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 32 Configuring Imaging Enterprise Scan Web Interface

• The Scan Group Name option is especially sensitive. A misspelled


group name results in all Content Server users being prevented from
using the function.
• This version provides neither Browse nor Check buttons that would
simplify the configuration of the Scan Group Name field.

Frequently asked questions

How do I write my own script in this scenario?


Scripting cannot be used in this scenario. All the profiles manipulation is
performed on the Content Server side and complete profile definition is
delivered to Enterprise Scan. This feature is designed to minimize the interaction
between Enterprise Scan and the user in administrative mode. Profile definition
includes an indexing form that is dynamically generated. The rules for form
construction are based on the category definition and system node attributes
specified for a given location in Content Server.

How do I release a batch of documents to Content Server in different locations?


You do not. This scenario is synchronous. The most common scenario is: You
navigate in Content Server to the desired location and select the menu item from
the folder pop up Scan & Index menu. Enterprise Scan is activated; you scan a
document, fill in required indexing data and release that document to Content
Server. If you scan additional documents, then the same set of attributes is used
for all documents on the stack. When a user issues a request to archive them all
then one document is created. All other scanned documents are eventually
released as new versions of the first document.

282 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 33

Scanning and indexing documents with Imaging


Enterprise Scan Web Interface

To use the Imaging Enterprise Scan Web Interface scenario Scan & Index for
folders:

1. Install Enterprise Scan on client side.

2. Start Content Server.

3. In the context menu of a folder, select Scan & Index to start Enterprise Scan.
Indexing view - The user interface consists of several views for which you can
configure the position and size. The Indexing view is dynamically built and
reflects the system of attributes associated with the folder in Content Server, in
which the Scan & Index function has been called. Attributes originate in system
attributes as well as in categories.

Note: Indexing attributes in the Imaging Enterprise Scan Web Interface


are “per document”, which means they persist with the document, even
when the focus switches to another document or the application is closed.

Document Name
This field is always automatically added in the indexing form.

Stock Item and User Name


These fields are defined inside a category associated with the folder in
Content Server.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 283


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 33 Scanning and indexing documents with Imaging Enterprise Scan Web Interface

Barcode and Text


These fields are additional system node attributes. The system node
attributes are always associated with all the nodes of Content Server.

Behavior of the controls - The behavior of the controls imported from Content
Server is similar to that of the controls used in the web interface of Content
Server. Enterprise Scan interprets the attribute arrays as well as group of
attributes.
Limitation of the indexing form - Enterprise Scan indexing form is somewhat
limited compared with the web interface. Content Server allows defining arrays
for whole sets of attributes. Enterprise Scan then cannot process more than the
first set in such an array. However both sets and arrays (except array of sets) are
imported without limitations.
The indexing form is not able to display more than 100 rows for an array. The
maximum value of elements in an array is preset in Content Server to value 50.
This value however can be overridden by user configuration. Assuming that the
user value is higher than 100, then only the first 100 elements in the array can be
displayed in indexing form inside Enterprise Scan.
Behavior of other attributes - The behavior of other attributes related either to
the system node or to a category is inherited from Content Server.

4. Click Archive to release the document together with additional indexing data to
Content Server. In one indexing session, exactly one document can be released.
If more documents are sent (by accident or by design), Enterprise Scan releases
the first document only and holds the execution for other documents. Enterprise
Scan displays a dialog box where you can decide to create a new version or not.

5. Decide whether the release operation shall continue or not. Basically, all other
documents can be released as versions of the first document. This behavior is
determined by the fact that the Document Name attribute is constant for all
documents on the stack:

• Yes: Releases the new version.


• No: Skips the processing of the current document and proceed with the next
one.
• Cancel: Interrupts the release operation immediately. Only the first
document is actually released.

284 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Part 6
Appendix
Chapter 34
Searchable PDF Doctool

Introduction
The Searchable PDF Doctool, formerly known as OCR doctool, converts single or
multi-page image files into PDF files. For this task it makes use of the official RSO
(RecoStar Object Interface) API of OpenText Capture Recognition Engine.

The Doctool is just a small wrapper around the functionality of the recognition
engine, which itself exposes much more parameters than published in this Doctool.
But for simplicity these are reduced to only some major ones. For more information,
see “Commands” on page 287.

The parameterization of the underlying recognition engine is chosen in a way that


the resulting recognition quality is optimized for a broad range of image quality.

Only for experts of OpenText Capture Recognition

The parameterization of the recognition engine is stored in the installation


directory of the Seachable PDF Doctool in
Profiles/Default/DefaultProject.rsp and can be adjusted by
administrators on a global level.

After making changes restart Document Pipeline.

You can find more information and the documentation for OpenText Capture
Recognition Engine in the Knowledge Center (https://knowledge.opentext.com/
knowledge/llisapi.dll/Open/16516521).

You can use the Searchable PDF Doctool in the following Document Pipelines where
it is preconfigured:
• Store scanned documents with barcode into SAP (R3SC).
• Store scanned documents from R/3 dialog into SAP (R3SC).
• Store scanned documents into DocuLink (SCR3).
• Scan Pipeline for TCP (SCDMS).
• Document Pipeline for Content Server (DPLES).

Commands
Commands and their parameters for the Searchable PDF Doctool need to be placed
in the COMMANDS file. The following list contains the entries that are supported and
automatically written by Enterprise Scan according to the profile settings. For more
information, see “Configuring additional document attributes” on page 161.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 287


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 34 Searchable PDF Doctool

Notes
• The Searchable PDF Doctool is only allowed to be used in combination with
so called scan pipelines, that is document pipelines which are intended to be
used with Enterprise Scan.
• It is only possible to run one instance of the doctool within the Document
Pipeline framework. Running more than one instance is not a useful scenario
since the workload is managed by the doctool itself. For more information,
see “Optimization options” on page 289.

OCR <dest-name> <dest-type> <source-name> <source-type>


This command is mandatory and it is the main command which triggers the
doctool’s functionality. It specifies the source and destination paths and types.
All other commands have no effect if this one is not set.
Only <dest-type> {application/pdf} and <source-type> {multipage/tiff, image/
jpeg} are supported.

OCRLANGUAGE <language>
This command is optional and specifies the language. Currently there is no
automatic language detection available.
The default value is ENGLISH.
Available values are { ENGLISH, AZERBAIJANI_LATIN, BULGARIAN,
CROATIAN, CZECH, DANISH, DUTCH, ESTONIAN, FINNISH, FRENCH,
GERMAN, GREEK, HUNGARIAN, IRISH, ITALIAN, LITHUANIAN,
LUXEMBOURGISH, NORWEGIAN, POLISH, PORTUGUESE,
RHAETO_ROMANIC, ROMANIAN, RUSSIAN, SLOVAK, SLOVENIAN,
SPANISH, SWEDISH, TURKISH }
See the xml attribute Country='ENGLISH' in the DefaultProject.rsp file.

OCRLANGUAGEEXTENSION <extension>
This command is optional and determines whether to recognize characters from
all languages which are associated with the same code page as the language
selected by the OCRLANGUAGE parameter.
The default value is off.
Available values are on and off.
This command is necessary if for example a mixture of German and French
documents should be converted. Specifying only GERMAN would lead to the
restriction that French accents are not correctly read.
In most cases ENGLISH in combination with OCRLANGUAGEXTENSION=on is the
best choice, because then all characters of the Western Europe code page 1252
will be read.

OCRTARGETSEARCHABLE <searchable>
This command is optional and determines whether output PDF contains OCR
data.
The default value is on.

288 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Available values are on and off.
See the xml attribute FormReading='true' in the DefaultProject.rsp file.

OCRTARGETPDFA <pdfa>
This command is optional and determines whether output PDF is of type PDF-
A.
The default value is on.
Available values are on and off.
See the xml attribute PDFVersion='PDF/A-1b' in the
DefaultBatchOperator.xml file.

Optimization options
Reducing the Since the Doctool uses as much resources as possible it may happen that there is not
workload enough CPU power left for other processes. The Doctool creates by default as many
sub processes as CPU cores available and tries to makes use of them all. You can
adjust this behavior in a way that the Doctool can be restricted to a distinct number
of processes.
The behavior is defined in the xml attribute ProcessCount in the
Profiles/Default/DefaultBatchOperator.rsp file. The default value is
Automatic. Specify the number of processes, and then restart the Doctool.

Troubleshooting
In case of an error, the ocrdt.log file is created. The errors are written to this file
and to the DPprotocol file in the DPDIR directory.

Typical problems

The resulting PDF file contains no text.


Solution: Check the parameter OCRTARGETSEARCHABLE. It must be set to on.

Certain characters in my text never come right.


Solution: Make sure that the OCRLANGUAGE parameter is set to the language which
is associated with the desired codepage.

The file size of the resulting PDF file is very high.


Solution: To reduce the file size of the resulting PDF file you have the following
options:

• Set the parameter OCRTARGETPDFA to off. The resulting PDF files will not be
PDF-A compliant.
• Set OCRTARGETSEARCHABLE to off. The resulting PDF files will only contain
images and no further textual information that could be used to search
within the PDF.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 289


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 35
Configuring JAWS screen reader

You can use Enterprise Scan with JAWS screen reader software that allows blind
and visually impaired users to read the screen. For supported JAWS screen reader
versions, web browsers, and restrictions, see the Release Notes.

To configure JAWS screen reader:

• Configure JAWS screen reader to read column headers such as Name, Input,
Processing, and Archiving. You must do this for each individual dialog of the
listview in the Profile Manager dialog box.

a. Start JAWS, and then select the dialog you want to to configure.
b. Click Insert, and then press F2.
c. In the Run JAWS Manager dialog box, select Customize ListView, and
then click OK.
d. In the Customize Headers dialog box, configure the settings for your
needs.

To read scale units:

• Place the cursor above the word, and then press INSERT and 5.
Alternativelly, use the JAWS cursor (Num and minus) and after that arrow-up
or arrow-down the key to select a line.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 291


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 36
Creating customer specific online help

Enterprise Scan has an online help included. It is also possible to include a customer
specific help file.

You can find the customer specific help in the Help menu, clicking Help > Customer
Help.

To create a customer specific online help:

1. Generate your own chm file with your company specific user instructions, for
example using the HTML Help Workshop from Microsoft.

2. Rename this file to coh_IxScan.chm.

3. Copy this file to <Open Text installation directory>\bin and overwrite the
existing file.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 293


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 37
Frequently asked questions

37.1 General questions


1. How can I get the build number?
Click Help > About Enterprise Scan. The build number is updated when you
apply a patch.
The version and build number is shown in the following format, for example
10.5.0.1 (Build #376) = 10.5.0 (version number) .1 (patch number) (Build
number #376). The tooltip also displays Patch ESC-1050-001 is installed.
2. How can I get the patch level?
In the <Open Text installation directory>/Scan folder open the
Version_info.txt file. The patch number is listed.
3. How can I use functions using keyboard?
All functions are available through the shortcuts and listed in “Menus and
icons“ on page 239.
4. How can I cancel a time-intensive operation?
Click Cancel in the progress window.
5. How can I keep the SAP GUI on top when performing archiving operation
through SAP GUI?
To keep the SAP GUI on top, unset the Keep Scan GUI in foreground when
invoked by SAP option in the Configure Workstation Options dialog box.
It changes the registry key B:KeepOnTop to false in HKEY_CURRENT_USER
\Software\IXOS\IXOS_ARCHIVE\6.0\Scan\HKLM\ConfigurationSetting.

37.2 Questions about scanners


1. How can a user display the Driver and the All Settings tabs for ISIS scanners in
the scanner configuration dialog box?
Hold Shift down while you call up the dialog box.
2. Which TIFF formats are supported by Enterprise Scan?
Enterprise Scan supports all TIFF formats with the following compression:
• CCITT Group 3.1 compression (for reading only)
• CCITT Group 3.2 compression (for reading only)
• CCITT Group 4 compression (reading and writing)
• Huffman's compression (for reading only)
• Packed bits compression (for reading only)

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 295


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Chapter 37 Frequently asked questions

• Uncompressed (for reading only)


• JPEG compression (for reading only)

For more information, see also Release Notes.

37.3 Questions about barcodes


1. Are there any requirements that a barcode of type 2/5 Interleaved should consist
of an odd or even number of signs, except the check sign?
If there is a check sign (checksum), the number of the other signs (digits) must be
odd. Due to the interleaving of the characters, the number of characters in an
Interleaved 2 of 5 message must be even. The character, if used, must be
included in the character count. If the message has an odd number of characters,
add zero (0) to the beginning of the message.
2. How is the checksum of the 2/5 Interleaved barcode computed?
Follow these steps:
a. Add the digits at the odd positions and multiply the result by 3.
b. Add the digits at the even positions.
c. Add results from 1. and 2.
d. Round up the value from 3. to the nearest multiplication of 10.
e. The checksum (the last digit of the result) is the difference between 4. and 3.
Example: Checksumed number = 0433848
a. (0 + 3 + 8 + 8) * 3 = 57
b. 4 + 3 + 4 = 11
c. 57 + 11 = 68
d. 70
e. 70 - 68 = 2
Result = 04338482
More info: The same algorithm is used for EAN13, EAN8, UPC Version A, UPC
Version E, 2/5 Datalogic, 2/5 IATA, 2/5 Industrial, 2/5 Inverted and 2/5 Matrix
barcode symbologies.
3. What is the limit to the length of recognized barcodes?
The limit is 255 characters.
4. What is the syntax of the “regular expression” used during barcode recognition?
For regular expression matching, OpenText use the public domain library. For
more information, see “Working with regular expressions“ on page 273.
5. How can I select or deselect all the barcodes in the list (Configure Separation by
Barcode dialog box) to be recognized, ignored, and checked for Checksum?
Hold down the Shift key and click on the required check boxes column.

296 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Glossary
Archive Center

Archive Center stores documents on long-term storage media. It consists of server


software and services, a database instance, connection to and management of
storage systems, and administration tools.

Archive Monitoring Web Client

It is a graphical user interface for monitoring the Document Pipelines and


additional data.

Archive Mode

Specifies the different archiving scenarios used by Enterprise Scan. The archive
mode is configured in the OpenText Administration Client.

Barcode

During mass scanning, Enterprise Scan can detect barcodes or patch codes and
separate the documents automatically. Then the barcode or patch code is
displayed in the Index field of the Properties tab.

Batch

Hierarchical document attribute in Enterprise Scan. In the hierarchy of attributes,


batch is located above folder. Hierarchical attributes can be assigned to documents
automatically during scanning or manually. The attributes are displayed in the
Properties view.

Capture Center

Capture Center is a solution for automatic document classification and data


extraction using optical character recognition. Enterprise Scan and Capture
Center work together to automate ingestion of documents into repositories and of
data into business solutions.

Configuration files

Configuration files contain configuration information for a particular program.


When the program is started, it consults the configuration file to see what
parameters have been set. Important configuration files for OpenText Imaging
Clients are the install.ini file, which contains the installation configuration for
Windows Viewer, DesktopLink, and Enterprise Scan, and the viewer.cfg files,
which contain the configuration information for Web Viewer.

DocTools

Programs for automatically processing documents in a Document Pipeline.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 297


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Glossary

Document Group

In Enterprise Scan you can subdivide documents in several groups. These groups
can be used to divide the archiving tasks between several employees.

Document Pipeline

A collection of processing modules (DocTools) that are used, for example, to


transfer or otherwise process documents to and in the Archive Center.

Document Stack

All scanned or imported documents that are currently displayed in Enterprise


Scan.

DPDIR

The directory in which the documents are temporarily stored while being
processed by the Document Pipeline.

Endorser

Some scanner models support endorsing, a process in which a stamp that is


printed on each scanned sheet to confirm scanning. The endorser is displayed in
the Properties tab in Enterprise Scan.

Enterprise Scan

Short name for OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan. It is a component of OpenText


Imaging. Enterprise Scan is designed for mass scanning scenarios. You can scan
documents from various input sources, sort them into documents, and then
archive these documents.

FaxLink

Functionality of Enterprise Scan that connects Enterprise Scan to fax or mail


servers, such as Microsoft Exchange Server, or Lotus Domino Server.

Folder

Hierarchical document attribute in Enterprise Scan. In the hierarchy of attributes,


“folder” is located below batch. Hierarchical attributes can be assigned to
documents automatically during scanning or manually. The attributes are
displayed in the Properties view.

Index

Special collection of information used to locate documents or data objects more


rapidly during searches.
The scan operator can define the index information in a form before archiving the
document. The fields of this form are defined in Enterprise Scan itself, with the
TCP Modeler or on Content Server.

298 OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1
Glossary

The term Index has also a second meaning in Enterprise Scan. In the Index field of
the Properties tab, the recognized barcode or patch code is displayed. For more
information, see Barcode.

Indexing

Provision of additional information (index) to speed up search functions. When


record properties are indexed, values are entered in the properties fields of the
records. In general, user input is required here, or the values are automatically
extracted and entered from documents or from their context using special
processing modules, for example in a Document Pipeline.

Leading application

Software solution connected to a Content Server product, for example SAP,


Siebel, or Microsoft Office SharePoint Server.

OpenText Administration Client

Administrative tool for setting up and maintaining the Archive Center and its
components, such as archives, devices, disk buffers, jobs, archive modes and
users.

Patch code
See Barcode.

Servtab files

Configuration files of the Spawner, which specify which DocTools and processes to
start and how to start them.

Spawner

Service that starts and terminates the DocTools and processes of the Document
Pipelines.

OpenText Imaging Enterprise Scan – User and Administration Guide 299


CLES160000-UGD-EN-1

You might also like